2022 OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO
Second Edition
22_GU_OM_EN_USC
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A.,
used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).
U. S.
alfaromeousa.com/
owners/owners-service-manual
Canada
alfaromeo.ca/en/
owners/owners-service-manual
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of
the Warranty Booklet by calling 844-253-2872 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed
copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular
telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo
brand vehicle and to
provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com
(U.S.), www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call
a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
1
Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for the purchase of your Alfa Romeo.
We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary
time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.
Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical
features of your Alfa Romeo.
You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of
your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.
This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance
of your Alfa Romeo over time.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that Alfa
Romeo offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo.
For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact:
Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI
48321–8004
Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada):
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English)
Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
READ THIS CAREFULLY
Refueling
Gas engines: Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage
vital components of the supply system.
Diesel engines: Do not use other products or mixtures as they may cause damage to the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the
warranty. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see
Ú
page 239.
Starting The Engine
Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then
push the engine START/STOP button.
Parking On Flammable Material
The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on potential fire hazards such as: grass, dry leaves,
pine needles or other flammable material.
Respecting The Environment
The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the
environment (if equipped).
Electrical Accessories
If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, with the risk of gradually draining the battery, contact an authorized
dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.
Scheduled Servicing
Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and
safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Rollover Warning
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity
than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go
out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely
may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal
use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS
Accessories Purchased By The Owner
If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any
case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact an authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical
system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.
NOTE:
Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect effi-
ciency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal (mats, etc.).
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed
in compliance with the provided instructions.
Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices
FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.
NOTE:
Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty
in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed
in compliance with the provided instructions.
Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones
Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is
mounted externally.
Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is
concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.
WARNING!
Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.
CAUTION!
The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the
safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.
If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system
may occur.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Operating Instructions
Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the
driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate.
The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the Index at the end of this manual.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter
order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page.
Warnings And Cautions
While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the
vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.
Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:
Personal Safety:
Vehicle Safety:
NOTE:
This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional equipment meant for specific markets or particular models are not identified as such in the
text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the
specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped.
The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the
vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
6
Symbols Key
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all
warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installation, operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the topic.
READ THE OWNER’S MANUAL DO NOT TOUCH WITH HANDS
COMPONENT CAN START
AUTOMATICALLY ALSO WHEN
ENGINE IS OFF
PROTECT YOUR EYES
DO NOT OPEN THE CAP WHEN THE
ENGINE IS HOT
DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PRESSURE GAS
KEEP CHILDREN AT A DISTANCE BURSTING
MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS OF
YOUR BODY AND CLOTHES AWAY
DO NOT APPROACH FLAMES CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
8
READ THIS CAREFULLY
Refueling.....................................................2
Starting The Engine....................................2
Parking On Flammable Material ...............2
Respecting The Environment .................... 2
Electrical Accessories ................................ 2
Scheduled Servicing .................................. 2
Rollover Warning ........................................3
VEHICLE CHANGES /
ALTERATIONS
Accessories Purchased By The Owner......4
Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices ....4
Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ... 4
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Operating Instructions ...............................5
Warnings And Cautions..............................5
Symbols Key ...............................................6
Symbols ..................................................... 6
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
KEYS..........................................................19
Key Fob................................................... 19
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM ..............21
IGNITION SWITCH .................................... 22
Keyless Push Button Ignition................ 22
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED.............. 23
How To Use Remote Start..................... 23
To Exit Remote Start Mode................... 23
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped............................................. 23
VEHICLE SECURITY
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 24
To Arm The System................................ 24
To Disarm The System .......................... 24
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection —
If Equipped............................................. 24
DOORS...................................................... 25
Power Door Locks.................................. 25
Locking The Doors With A Depleted
Battery.................................................... 25
Passive Entry System ........................... 26
Power Lock Safety Device..................... 28
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .. 28
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors............................................. 28
STEERING WHEEL.................................... 29
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column................................................... 29
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped ............................................ 30
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED ............................................ 30
Programming The Memory Feature ..... 30
Memory Position Recall ........................ 31
SEATS .......................................................31
Sparco Racing Seats (Quadrifoglio
Vehicles) — If Equipped .........................31
Split Folding Rear Seat ..........................32
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) ...........33
Heated Seats — If Equipped .................34
Head Restraints .....................................35
MIRRORS .................................................37
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................37
Vanity Mirror ...........................................37
Outside Power Mirrors ...........................38
Power Folding Outside Mirrors..............38
Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirrors — If Equipped.............................38
Heated Mirrors .......................................38
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
S ....................................39
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ............................................39
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels..39
Identifying Whether You Have A
Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code
Device .....................................................39
Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener..............................40
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device............................40
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button .....................................................41
Canadian/Gate Operator
Programming..........................................41
Security...................................................41
Troubleshooting Tips..............................41
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................................42
Headlight Switch ....................................42
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ............ 42
High Beam Headlights .......................... 42
Automatic Headlights ............................ 43
Flash-To-Pass ......................................... 43
Automatic High Beam Headlights —
If Equipped .............................................43
Parking Lights ....................................... 43
Headlight Off Delay................................ 43
Rear Fog Lights ......................................44
Adaptive Headlight System —
If Equipped .............................................44
Turn Signals ........................................... 44
Lane Change Assist ............................... 44
INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................................44
Front Map Reading Lights..................... 44
Interior Ambient Lighting ...................... 45
Rear Overhead Light .............................45
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control........ 45
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS....46
Windshield Wiper Operation .................46
Rain Sensing Wipers.............................. 47
Rear Window Wiper/Washer................. 47
Headlamp Washers — If Equipped ....... 47
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...............................48
Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control
System.................................................... 48
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT... 54
Glove Compartment...............................54
Center Console.......................................54
Rear Armrest ..........................................54
Power Outlets .........................................54
Cigar Lighter And Ash Tray —
If Equipped .............................................55
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ...55
POWER WINDOWS................................... 56
Power Window Controls.........................56
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection ...............................................57
Power Window System Initialization .....57
Wind Buffeting .......................................57
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........ 57
Power Sunroof........................................57
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ........58
Venting Sunroof......................................58
Sunshade Operation..............................58
Pinch Protect Feature ............................58
Re-Initialization Procedure ....................58
Sunroof Maintenance ............................59
HOOD ...................................................... 59
Opening The Hood .................................59
Closing The Hood ...................................59
POWER LIFTGATE ................................... 59
Opening...................................................59
Closing ....................................................60
Liftgate Initialization ..............................61
Cargo Area Features ..............................62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ........... 64
Instrument Cluster ............................... 64
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .......... 65
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........... 66
Instrument Cluster Display
Description............................................. 66
Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster
Display.................................................... 66
Reconfigurable Display Items............... 66
Customer Programmable Settings ....... 69
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL ................. 70
Red Warning Lights ............................... 70
Amber Warning Lights........................... 72
Green Indicator Lights........................... 74
Blue Indicator Lights ............................. 74
Red Symbols.......................................... 74
Amber Symbols...................................... 76
Green Symbols ...................................... 79
Blue Symbols ......................................... 79
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM............ 79
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ......................................... 79
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS.................... 80
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE............................81
Starting Procedure................................. 81
Remote Starting System .......................81
Cold Weather Operation........................ 82
Extended Park Starting.......................... 82
If Engine Fails To Start .......................... 82
After Starting — Warming Up The
Engine..................................................... 83
Stopping The Engine..............................83
Turbocharger Cool Down.......................83
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —
IF EQUIPPED ............................................83
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS...............................84
Engine Break-In......................................84
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) .................84
Electric Park Brake (EPB) Operating
Modes..................................................... 86
Safe Hold................................................ 86
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION....................86
Display .................................................... 87
Gear Selector ......................................... 87
Transmission Operating Modes............ 88
Automatic Transmission Limp Home
Mode....................................................... 90
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System......................................... 90
Important Notes.....................................91
ALFA DNA SELECTOR ...............................92
Alfa DNA System ....................................92
Driving Modes ........................................ 92
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) —
IF EQUIPPED............................................. 94
STOP/START SYSTEM.............................. 95
Operating Mode..................................... 95
System Manual Activation/
Deactivation........................................... 95
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop .......................................... 95
Engine Restarting Conditions ............... 96
Safety Functions.................................... 96
Energy Saving Function......................... 96
Irregular Operation ................................ 96
Vehicle Inactivity.................................... 96
SPEED LIMITER........................................ 97
Description............................................. 97
Activation ............................................... 97
Speed Limit Programming .................... 97
Exceeding The Programmed Speed ..... 97
Programmed Speed Icon Flashing ....... 97
Deactivation........................................... 97
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED............................................. 98
Cruise Control ........................................ 98
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ........... 100
HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM (HAS) —
IF EQUIPPED...........................................106
To Activate/Deactivate........................ 106
Operation ............................................. 107
Indications On The Display ................. 107
System Status...................................... 108
Limited System Availability/
Operation ............................................. 109
TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA) SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................... 109
To Activate/Deactivate ....................... 109
Operation............................................. 110
Indications On The Display................. 110
System Status ..................................... 111
Limited System Availability/
Operation............................................. 111
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........................ 112
To Activate/Deactivate ....................... 112
Indications On The Display................. 113
INTELLIGENT SPEED CONTROL (ISC)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........................ 113
To Activate/Deactivate ....................... 114
Indications On The Display................. 114
Acceptance/Rejection Of The
Suggested Speed ................................ 114
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......... 115
ParkSense Sensors............................. 115
ParkSense Display .............................. 115
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.... 116
ParkSense Warning Display ............... 116
Operation With A Trailer...................... 117
ParkSense System Usage
Precautions ......................................... 117
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM ................................................. 117
Lane Departure Warning Operation... 117
Turning Lane Departure Warning On
Or Off.................................................... 118
Lane Departure Warning Message .... 118
Changing Lane Departure Warning
Status................................................... 119
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA) SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................... 119
Turning Lane Keeping Assist On
Or Off ....................................................120
Lane Keeping Assist Warning
Message ...............................................120
REAR BACK UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC
GRIDLINES ............................................ 122
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................... 124
Refueling Capacity...............................124
Refueling Procedure ...........................124
VEHICLE LOADING................................. 126
Certification Label................................126
TRAILER TOWING................................... 127
Common Towing Definitions ...............127
Trailer Hitch Classification ..................128
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) ........................128
Trailer And Tongue Weight .................129
Towing Requirements..........................129
Towing Tips ..........................................131
Installing The Receiver ........................131
Connecting The Electrical System ......132
Removing The Receiver.......................132
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING................ 132
Saving Fuel...........................................132
Driving Style .........................................132
Conditions Of Use ................................133
Performance — Quadrifoglio ...............133
SAFETY
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ..................... 135
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 135
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)
System — If Equipped ......................... 135
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
System ................................................. 136
Drive Train Control (DTC) System....... 136
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System ................................................. 136
Hill Descent Control (HDC) System —
If Equipped .......................................... 137
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System ............ 138
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System....... 138
Traction Control System (TCS)............ 139
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.............. 139
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System — If Equipped ......................... 139
Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA)
System — If Equipped ........................ 141
Driver Attention Assist (DAA)
System — If Equipped ......................... 144
Forward Collision Warning Plus
(FCW+) System — If Equipped ........... 145
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).................................................. 149
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....... 151
Occupant Restraint Systems
Features .............................................. 151
Important Safety Precautions............. 151
Seat Belt Systems ..............................152
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS)..................................................... 156
Child Restraints ...................................164
SAFETY TIPS........................................... 173
Transporting Passengers .................... 173
Transporting Pets ................................ 173
Connected Vehicles............................. 173
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle .............................. 173
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle .................. 174
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 174
Carbon Monoxide Warnings................ 175
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............176
SOS — EMERGENCY CALL..................... 176
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING............. 178
General Instructions............................ 179
Jack Information And Usage
Precautions..........................................179
Changing Procedure............................179
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ....... 181
Description........................................... 181
Inflation Procedure..............................182
Checking And Restoring Tire
Pressure............................................... 184
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
JUMP STARTING ................................... 184
Remote Battery Connection Posts......184
Jump Starting Procedure.....................186
Bump Starting .....................................187
ENGINE OVERHEATING ......................... 187
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................... 188
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............ 188
Four-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models.........189
TOW EYES ............................................. 189
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................................... 190
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............ 190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING....................... 191
Periodic Checks ...................................191
Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle ...............191
Maintenance Plan — 2.0L Engine.......192
Maintenance Plan — 2.9L Engine.......194
ENGINE COMPARTMENT....................... 196
Checking Levels — 2.0L Engine ..........196
Checking Levels — 2.9L Engine ..........197
Engine Oil .............................................197
Engine Coolant Fluid............................198
Washer Fluid For Windshield/
Headlights ............................................198
Brake Fluid ...........................................199
Automatic Transmission Activation
System Oil ............................................199
Useful Advice For Extending The
Life Of Your Battery..............................199
Battery ..................................................199
Pressure Washing................................200
BATTERY RECHARGING .........................200
Important Notes .................................. 200
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE........................201
Engine Oil ............................................. 201
Engine Oil Filter ................................... 201
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .....................201
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance........................................ 201
Lubricating Moving Parts Of The
Bodywork ............................................. 202
Windshield Wiper................................. 202
Exhaust System ................................... 204
Cooling System .................................... 204
Braking System....................................205
Automatic Transmission ..................... 206
Replacing The Battery ......................... 206
Fuses.................................................... 206
Bulb Replacement............................... 212
TIRES .....................................................216
Tire Safety Information ....................... 216
Tires — General Information ............... 222
Spare Tires — If Equipped ................... 226
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...............227
Tire Types............................................. 227
Tire Chains and Traction Devices....... 228
Tire Rotation Recommendations........ 229
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ........229
Treadwear ............................................229
Traction Grades ...................................229
Temperature Grades ........................... 230
STORING THE VEHICLE .........................230
BODYWORK ........................................... 231
Protection Against Atmospheric
Agents .................................................. 231
Corrosion Warranty ............................. 231
Preserving The Bodywork .................. 231
INTERIORS ............................................. 232
Seats And Fabric Parts ....................... 232
Leather Seats...................................... 232
Plastic And Coated Parts .................... 232
Alcantara Parts — If Equipped............ 232
Genuine Leather Parts........................ 232
Carbon Fiber Parts .............................. 232
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) ....................................................... 233
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Plate..................................................... 233
ENGINE .................................................. 233
POWER SUPPLY..................................... 234
TRANSMISSION ..................................... 235
BRAKES.................................................. 235
SUSPENSION ......................................... 235
STEERING .............................................. 235
DIMENSIONS ......................................... 236
Luggage Compartment Volume ......... 238
WEIGHTS................................................ 238
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
FUEL REQUIREMENTS........................... 239
Reformulated Gasoline .......................239
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends................239
CNG And LP Fuel System
Modifications .......................................240
MMT In Gasoline..................................240
Materials Added To Fuel .....................240
Fuel System Cautions..........................240
FLUID CAPACITIES ................................. 241
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 242
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..... 243
PERFORMANCE ..................................... 244
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE .............. 245
Prepare For The Appointment ............ 245
Prepare A List ...................................... 245
Be Reasonable With Requests........... 245
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................... 245
Alfa Romeo Customer Center............. 245
Alfa Romeo Customer Care
(Canada) .............................................. 245
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).......... 245
Service Contract ................................. 245
WARRANTY INFORMATION ................... 246
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS..............246
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. ................................. 246
In Canada............................................. 246
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............. 247
GENERAL INFORMATION....................... 247
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
14
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition
of each symbol
Ú
page 70.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú
page 70
Brake Warning Light
Ú
page 70
Electronic Braking Force Distribution (EBD) Failure
Ú
page 71
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú
page 71
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú
page 71
Amber Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú
page 72
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
Ú
page 72
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Ú
page 72
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Ú
page 72
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
Ú
page 72
Fuel Reserve/Limited Range
Ú
page 73
Rear Fog Lights
Ú
page 73
Tire Pressure Low Warning Light
Ú
page 73
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú
page 73
Amber Warning Lights
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Green Warning Lights
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light
Ú
page 74
Left Turn Signal Indicator Light
Ú
page 74
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú
page 74
Right Turn Signal Indicator Light
Ú
page 74
Blue Warning Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú
page 74
Red Symbols
Alfa Steering Torque (AST) Failure
Ú
page 74
Alternator Failure
Ú
page 74
Automatic Transmission Failure
Ú
page 74
Brake Disc Temperature
Ú
page 74
Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System Activation
Ú
page 74
Door Open
Ú
page 75
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú
page 75
Engine Coolant Temperature Too High
Ú
page 75
Hood Not Properly Shut
Ú
page 75
Insufficient Engine Oil Level
Ú
page 75
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Ú
page 75
Power Steering Failure
Ú
page 75
Liftgate Not Properly Shut
Ú
page 76
Red Symbols
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
16
Amber Symbols
ABS Activation
Ú
page 76
Adaptive Front Lighting System Failure
Ú
page 76
Automatic High Beam Headlights Failure
Ú
page 76
Automatic Transmission Fluid Overheating
Ú
page 78
Audio System Failure
Ú
page 76
All Wheel Drive Failure
Ú
page 76
Blind Spot Monitoring System Failure
Ú
page 76
Dusk Sensor Failure
Ú
page 76
Dynamic Drive Control System Failure
Ú
page 76
Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System Failure
Ú
page 76
Electric Park Brake Failure
Ú
page 76
Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-In Attempt
Ú
page 76
Engine Oil Change Required
Ú
page 77
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure
Ú
page 77
Engine Oil Level Sensor Failure
Ú
page 77
Exterior Lights Failure
Ú
page 77
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System Failure
Ú
page 78
Fuel Cut-Off Indicator Light
Ú
page 77
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
Ú
page 77
Fuel Cut-Off System Failure
Ú
page 77
Amber Symbols
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
17
Generic Indication
Ú
page 77
Highway Assist System (HAS)/Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)
System Failure
Ú
page 77
Keyless System Failure
Ú
page 77
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System Failure
Ú
page 77
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
Ú
page 78
Low Coolant Level
Ú
page 78
Park Sensors System Failure
Ú
page 78
Rain Sensor Failure
Ú
page 78
Stop/Start System Failure
Ú
page 78
Speed Limiter System Failure
Ú
page 78
Amber Symbols
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System
Ú
page 78
Soft Suspension Calibration Insertion
Ú
page 78
Shock Absorbers Failure
Ú
page 78
Temporary All Wheel Drive Failure
Ú
page 78
Wear On Brake Pads
Ú
page 78
Windshield Wiper Failure
Ú
page 79
Windshield Washer Liquid Level
Ú
page 78
Wear ON Carbon Ceramic Material (CCM) Brake Discs
Ú
page 79
Green Symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System
Ú
page 79
Amber Symbols
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
19
In this section, you will find important information
to help you become familiar with the features
needed to operate your vehicle, and how they
function.
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote
liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock
or unlock the doors and liftgate. The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored inside the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands
are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can
be verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow
Ú
page 247.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within one second to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate, push
the lock button once.
The current unlock setting can be changed
through the radio system menu, so that the
system unlocks:
All doors on the first push of the key fob unlock
button.
The driver door on the first push of the key fob
unlock button.
The liftgate "independently" or "with doors".
When the doors are locked/unlocked, the turn
signals will flash and the illuminated entry system
will be activated.
NOTE:
If one or more doors are open when the lock
button is pushed, or the liftgate is open, the doors
will lock. The doors will unlock again automati-
cally if the key fob is left inside the passenger
compartment, otherwise the doors will stay
locked.
Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/
unlocking the doors, and activation of the
courtesy light upon unlocking the doors, can be
activated or deactivated through the radio
system. For further information, refer to the
Information and Entertainment System Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Opening The Liftgate
Rapidly push the button on the key fob twice to
open the liftgate. The turn signals will flash to
indicate that the liftgate has been opened.
Key Left Vehicle Feature — If Equipped
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key
Fob Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will
also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence
of a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will
not activate until all of the doors are all closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and
extract the cover pulling downwards.
Key Fob Cover Removal
2. Remove the emergency key from its housing.
Removing Emergency Key
3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter
clockwise.
Removing Battery Plug
4. Remove the battery from its slot and replace
it with a new one. When replacing the battery,
match the (+) sign on the battery to the (+)
sign on the inside of the battery clip, located
on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Battery Location
Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
21
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Engine Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
For Quadrifoglio models, if you need a
replacement key fob, contact an authorized
dealer.
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The Engine Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized use of the vehicle by disabling
engine starting. The system does not need to be
enabled or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the
engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb
check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key fob to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is
a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have
the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key
Ú
page 247.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been
swallowed or placed inside any part of the
body, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does
not close securely, stop using the product
and keep it away from children.
CAUTION!
The battery replacement operation must be
done with care, in order not to damage the
electronic key.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position.
CAUTION!
The Engine Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes. These modes are OFF, ACC,
and ON/RUN.
Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Steering is locked
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power windows)
ON/RUN
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
If the ignition switch does not change the mode
by pushing the button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Proceed as follows:
1. Lift the front armrest.
2. Lay the key fob on the indicated spot in the
bottom of the center console, positioning the
key fob as shown in the following image,
while pushing the START/STOP ignition
button to start the ignition.
Key Fob Placement Location
NOTE:
For more information on proper engine
starting procedures, see
Ú
page 81.
With the keyless ignition in the ACC position, if
30 minutes pass with the gear selector in
PARK and the engine stopped, the keyless
ignition will automatically reset to the OFF
position.
When opening the driver's door with the ignition
in the ACC position (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in
the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the
message will display “Ignition Or Accessory On” in
the cluster
Ú
page 247.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the Keyless Push
Button Ignition in the ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
buildup may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
23
REMOTE START —
IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range
Ú
page 247.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn
will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start button
a third time shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10
seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
(if equipped) operation is disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ACC position
before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the unlock
button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or
unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button while pressing the brake
pedal.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
if the Remote Start button is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and front heated seat features will
automatically activate when ambient
temperature is less than 39°F (4°C). These
features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start.
NOTE:
This feature can be activated through the radio
system. Refer to the Information and Entertain-
ment System Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
VEHICLE SECURITY
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the keyless push button
ignition for unauthorized operation. It also
monitors movement inside the passenger
compartment (volumetric protection — if
equipped), cutting of battery cables, and
unexpected lifting/tilting of the vehicle (anti-lift
protection — if equipped).
While the Vehicle Security system is armed,
interior switches for door locks are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security system will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system is activated by the
Engine Immobilizer system, which is automati-
cally activated when you get out of the vehicle
with the key fob and lock the doors.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú
page 26.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors (or liftgate) are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door
Ú
page 26.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key
cylinder when the system is armed will sound
the alarm when the door is opened.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and
open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
NOTE:
The alarm does not disarm when the doors are
unlocked by inserting the blade of the emergency
key (found inside the key fob) into the door
handle lock cylinder.
VOLUMETRIC/ANTI-LIFT PROTECTION —
I
F EQUIPPED
To ensure the correct operation of the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system,
completely close the side windows.
To disable the function, push the Volumetric/
Anti-Lift Protection button before activating the
alarm.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
25
(Continued)
When the function is disabled, the light on the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button flashes for
several seconds.
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button
Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift
Protection must be repeated each time the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
DOORS
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Push the interior lock button on the rear door
panel trim to lock the rear doors only.
Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel
LOCKING THE DOORS WITH A DEPLETED
B
ATTERY
Proceed as follows to lock the doors if the vehicle
battery is depleted:
1. With the doors unlocked insert the emer-
gency key from the key fob or a screwdriver
into the door lock manual release lock
cylinder.
Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
buildup may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply the
parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all of
the doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder clock-
wise for the right door locks or counterclock-
wise for the left door locks.
3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the
manual release lock.
Proceed in one of the following ways to realign
the door lock device (only when the battery
charge has been restored):
Push the lock button on the key fob
Push the unlock button on the door panel
Unlock the driver’s door lock with the
emergency key
Operate the internal door handle
NOTE:
For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks are
engaged, and the previously described locking
procedure is carried out, operating the internal
handle will not open the door. Instead, it will only
realign the lock release device. To open the door,
the outside handle must be used. The door
central locking/unlocking buttons are not deacti-
vated when the emergency lock is engaged.
PASSIVE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and liftgate
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through the radio screen. Refer to the
Information and Entertainment System
Owner’s Manual Supplement for Passive Entry
settings.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking
the vehicle.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in
a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob close to the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the
vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will
unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing
the passenger door handle will unlock all doors
and the liftgate automatically.
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle, depending on the selected
setting in the radio. Refer to the Information
and Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement for Passive Entry settings.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
External Liftgate Release Button
(Vehicles With Passive Entry)
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which will
function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an
unauthorized key fob has been detected close to
the outside of the vehicle.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
27
If the Passive Entry function is disabled through
the radio screen, the protections to avoid
accidentally leaving the key fob inside the vehicle
are deactivated.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
close to either front door handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the Passive Entry lock button,
you must wait two seconds before you can lock
or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to check
if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door
handle without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors and liftgate can also be
locked by pushing the lock button on the key
fob or on the interior door lock.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
close to the liftgate, push the liftgate release
button.
External Liftgate Release Button
NOTE:
If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside
of the cargo area, and an attempt is made to
close it from outside, the liftgate will not lock.
With the doors locked, the liftgate unlocked,
and the key fob detected inside the vehicle, the
liftgate will unlock again and the lights flash
twice.
Before driving, make sure the liftgate is closed
correctly.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob close to the
vehicle, push the Passive Entry button located as
part of the liftgate release button switch. All doors
and the liftgate will lock. Door locking will activate
the alarm as well.
External Liftgate Release Switch
(Vehicles With Passive Entry)
NOTE:
The liftgate may still be locked by pushing the
lock button on the key fob, pushing the door lock
button on the door handles, or pushing the lock
button on the interior door panel of the vehicle
Ú
page 247.
POWER LOCK SAFETY DEVICE
The Power Lock Safety Device prevents the
operation of the interior door handles and the
door lock and unlock buttons. The power lock
also prevents opening of the doors from inside
the passenger compartment.
It is recommended to lock the vehicle doors each
time the vehicle is parked.
Activating The Power Lock
The Power Lock Safety Device is enabled on all
the doors by quickly pushing the lock button on
the key fob twice.
The turn signals will flash to let you know that the
power lock is active.
If one or more of the doors are not closed
correctly, the Power Lock Safety Device will not
activate, preventing a person from getting stuck
inside the passenger compartment by entering
the vehicle, and then closing the open door.
Deactivating The Power Lock
The Power Lock Safety Device disengages
automatically:
When the doors are unlocked by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
When the keyless ignition is placed in the ON
position.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
12 mph (20 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
enabled/disabled through the radio screen.
Refer to the Information and Entertainment
System Owner’s Manual Supplement for further
information.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child Safety Lock Positions
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked
position), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
29
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open
a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it
is impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure
to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/
telescoping control handle down to the open
position. To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position,
push the tilt/telescoping control handle to the
closed position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
2 — Closed
3 — Open
4 — Tilt Movement
5 — Telescoping Movement
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel (e.g. permanently fixed covers) which
could interfere with the hand detection
sensor on the steering wheel of the Active
Blind Spot Assist (ABSA), Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA), Traffic Jam Assist (TJA), or
Highway Assist systems (HAS) (if equipped).
WARNING!
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any
after-market operation involving steering system
or steering column modifications (e.g. installa-
tion of anti-theft device) that could adversely
affect performance. Doing so could void the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, cause SERIOUS
SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and
could result in the vehicle not meeting applica-
ble government safety regulations.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting.
The heated steering wheel may not turn on when
it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on
the instrument panel.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
When the function is enabled, the indicator on
the button will illuminate.
Heated Steering Wheel Button
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see
Ú
page 23.
DRIVER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to three
different memory profiles for easy recall through
a memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat
Side mirrors
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s side door trim panel, near the door
handle. The switch consists of three buttons, one
for each memory profile.
Memory Setting Switch Location
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC posi-
tion (do not start the engine), and make sure
the driver’s door is closed.
NOTE:
A memory profile can also be set for three
minutes after the driver’s door has been opened.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences, driver’s seat and mirror posi-
tions.
3. Push and hold the memory button you want
to program for 1.5 seconds. A chime will
sound to indicate that the memory profile has
been saved successfully.
NOTE:
When a new profile as been set, the previously
set profile for that button will be overwritten.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
5 — Driver Memory Settings Buttons
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
31
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
To recall a previously set position, push and
release the memory profile button assigned to
the desired positions.
NOTE:
Memory position recall can be done for approxi-
mately three minutes after the doors have been
opened, and for approximately one minute after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
SPARCO RACING SEATS (QUADRIFOGLIO
V
EHICLES) — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Seat Adjustment
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The adjustment lever is at the front of the seat,
near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
the seat is in the desired position. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
Push the height adjustment button upward or
downward to obtain your desired height.
Reclining The Seatback
To adjust the seatback, lift the recline lever
located on the outboard side of the seat, lean
back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
1 — Adjustment Lever
2 — Height Adjustment Button
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT
The rear seat is a 40/20/40 seat that allows the
luggage compartment to be partially or totally
extended.
Split Folding Rear Seat
Central Backrest Section Tilting
Before tilting the backrest, make sure that the
rear center seat belt is not fastened and that
there are no objects on the seat itself (if there are
any, remove them).
Pull the release strap upward to release the
central part of the backrest from its housing and
tilt it forward using the head restraint.
Center Backrest Section Tilting
Central Backrest Section Repositioning
Using the head restraint, lift the central portion
upwards, manually guiding it back into place.
Lightly push to make sure that it is properly
latched. Make sure that the armrest is properly
latched by gently trying to move it. If it is not
latched, repeat the operation.
Repositioning The Backrests
Move the seat belts to the side, making sure that
they are correctly extended and not twisted. Also
make sure that they are not caught on anything
behind the backrests of the seats. Then, lift the
backrests by pushing them rearward until you
hear the lock click into place on both attachment
mechanisms.
Extending The Luggage Compartment
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide an additional storage area.
Extending the right side of the luggage
compartment allows you to carry two passengers
on the left part of the rear seat, while extending
the left side allows you to carry one passenger.
Proceed as follows:
1. Completely lower the rear seat head
restraints
Ú
page 35.
2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't impede
the movement of the backrest while tilting it.
3. Pull the left-hand seatback release lever
(inside the luggage compartment or the release
at the base of the rear seat accessible from the
rear doors) to fold down the left side, or the
right-hand seatback release lever to fold down
the right side of the backrest. It will fold
forwards automatically. If necessary, assist the
backrest during the initial stage of tilting.
Seatback Release Lever In Luggage
Compartment
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
1 — Seatback Release Lever
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
33
NOTE:
Pull both seatback release levers to fold down
both backrests. Tilting the rear seat completely
forward allows for maximum loading volume.
You may need to move the front seats forward
in order for the rear seats to fold forward
completely.
Seatback Release Lever Below Rear Seat
It is also possible to disengage the sections of the
rear seat from inside the luggage compartment or
by using one of the two levers located below the
rear seat. Each lever folds down the section of the
backrest on the same side.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
NOTE:
The seat layout may vary according to the vehicle
options.
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use
these switches to move the driver's seat up,
down, forward, and rearward, or to recline the
seatback.
Power Seat Adjustment
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat adjustment switch.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat
switch, and the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down — If Equipped
The seat angle can be adjusted in four directions.
Lift or push the front part of seat switch to move
the front part of the seat in the corresponding
direction. Release the seat switch when the seat
has reached the desired position.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the recline switch.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
1 — Seat Adjustment
2 — Recline Adjustment
3 — Lumbar Adjustment
4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons
(If Equipped)
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt, which could result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
Power Lumbar
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped
Lift the adjustment lever and push the front of the
cushion forward or rearward to extend the
cushion by a few inches (centimeters).
Seat Cushion Extension
Power Bolster Adjustment — If Equipped
Push the power bolster adjustment buttons to
regulate the width of the backrest through the
lateral padding.
Easy Entry Function
The Easy Entry function is designed to move the
driver side seat forward automatically by
2.36 inches (6 cm) to make it easier for the driver
to get in and out of the car.
The movement is activated only if the seat is set
to a driving position which is in front of the B-pillar
of the vehicle.
The function is associated with power driver
seats for each of the three stored positions.
The Easy Entry function can be activated/
deactivated through the radio system. Refer to
the Information and Entertainment System
Owner’s Manual Supplement for further
information.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see
Ú
page 23.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
NOTE:
Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with Sparco
Racing Seats will not be equipped with the
heated seat feature.
A push of the heated seat buttons
located on the instrument panel, near
the climate controls, will select the heat
levels in order of highest to lowest. A
fourth push of the button will turn the heated seat
off.
NOTE:
The heated seat function can also be activated
through the radio system. Refer to the Informa-
tion and Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
You can select three heating levels:
Maximum — three LED indicators illuminated
on the buttons
Average — two LED indicators illuminated on
the buttons
Minimum — one LED indicator illuminated on
the buttons
Heated Seat Buttons
6 — Adjustment Lever
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
35
NOTE:
After selecting a heating level, heat will be felt
within a few minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The “minimum” setting is automatically
deactivated once a certain period of time has
elapsed.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
If equipped with rear heated seats, the
controls can be found on the rear of the
center console and will function the
same as the front heated seat controls.
Rear Heated Seat Buttons
NOTE:
To preserve the battery charge, this function
cannot be activated when the engine is off.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event
of a rear impact. Head restraints should be
adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
NOTE:
For Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with Sparco
Racing Seats, the head restraints are not adjust-
able or removable.
The front head restraints may be
height-adjustable.
To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint until it clicks into place.
To lower the head restraint, push in the
adjustment button and lower the head restraint
to the desired height while holding the button.
Then, release the adjustment button.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the
Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the
Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
To allow for maximum visibility for the driver, if a
seat is not occupied by a passenger, the head
restraint can be lowered to the fully lowered posi-
tion.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustments
The height of the outboard head restraints can be
adjusted. The head restraint of the center seat, if
equipped, cannot be adjusted, only removed.
For upward adjustment, pull upward on the head
restraint until it clicks into place.
For downward adjustment, push in the
adjustment button and lower the head restraint
at the same time to the desired height.
Rear Head Restraint
NOTE:
To allow for maximum visibility for the driver, if a
seat is not occupied by a passenger, the head
restraint should be lowered to the fully lowered
position.
Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraints, proceed as
follows:
1. Recline the seatback to allow clearance of
the head restraint from the vehicle’s roof.
2. Raise the head restraints to their maximum
height.
3. Push the adjustment button and the release
button at the side of the two supports at the
same time.
4. Pull upward on the head restraint to fully
remove it.
To reinstall the head restraints, proceed as
follows:
1. Hold down both the adjustment button and
release button while placing the head
restraint posts into the holes.
2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the
appropriate height for the passengers.
3. Replace the seatback to the appropriate
position for passengers.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
37
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the
button at the base of the mirror.
Electrochromic Mirror Power Button
VANITY MIRROR
On the driver and passenger sun visor, there is a
light which illuminates the sun visor mirror when
folded down.
Lift For Vanity Mirror
The courtesy light turns on automatically by lifting
the cover.
Sun Visors
The sun visors are located at the sides of the
interior rearview mirror. They can be adjusted
forward and toward the side window.
To direct the visor toward the passenger side
window, detach the visor from the interior
rearview mirror side hook and turn it towards the
side window.
From this position, the sun visor can also be
extended toward the rear of the vehicle for
additional blockage of sunlight.
There are courtesy mirrors with lights on the back
of the sun visors.
Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger Window
NOTE:
A rear facing child restraint system should never
be fitted in the front passenger seat. Always
comply with the instructions on the sun visor
Ú
page 164.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean
cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
OUTSIDE POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s
side door trim panel.
To adjust the power mirrors, first select the
desired mirror using the power mirror control.
To adjust the selected mirror, push the knob in
the direction desired.
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob
to the neutral position to prevent accidental
movements.
The power mirrors can be adjusted with the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Power Mirror Control
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power
Folding Mirror function, make sure the power
mirror control knob is in the neutral position, and
move the knob to the power folding position.
Move the knob again to return the mirrors to the
driving position.
If the power mirror control knob is moved again
during door mirror folding (from closed to open
position and vice versa), the movement direction
is reversed.
Folding Mirror
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the
vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed,
and the doors are locked). The mirrors return to
the driving position when the vehicle is then
unlocked.
If the door mirrors were folded using the power
mirror control knob, they can only be returned to
the driving position by moving the knob to the
power folding position again.
NOTE:
The power folding operation can be enabled only
when the vehicle speed is lower than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically dim for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
HEATED MIRRORS
Push the rear defrost button, located within
the climate controls, to activate the heated
mirrors.
1 — Power Mirror Control Knob
A — Left
B — Right
C — Power Folding Position
D — Neutral
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on
side convex mirrors could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance
of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
39
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers,
motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active
Ú
page 247.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio-Frequency (RF) signal,
it is recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying
to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it for
the first time.
If you require assistance, please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or visit
HomeLink.com
.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have
rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the antenna is attached to the device. The button
may not be immediately visible when looking at
the device. The name and color of the button may
vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
1 — HomeLink® Button 1
2 — HomeLink® Button 2
3 — HomeLink® Button 3
4 — HomeLink® Indicator
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, proceed
as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all chan-
nels when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you
are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens, release
both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor oper-
ates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for
the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to
a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener
Ú
page 40. Be sure to determine if the
device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this Cana-
dian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed
to time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transmitter. Do not program the
transmitter if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the
transmitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
41
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, proceed as follows. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
The programming of transmitters in Canada/
United States require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan-
nels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to flash
after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com
for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel
lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and rear fog lights.
In addition, there are buttons for the ParkSense
system and Engine Stop/Start
Ú
page 81.
Headlight Switch
The instrument panel and the various controls on
the dashboard will be illuminated when the
exterior lights are turned on.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light
and instrument panel lights are also turned on.
To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low intensity)
come on automatically whenever the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and the headlight
switch is turned to the position, and the dusk
sensor detects sufficient external light.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
If equipped, the DRLs can be activated/
deactivated from the radio system, by selecting
the following functions in sequence on the main
MENU:
1. Settings
2. Lights
3. Daytime Running Lights
NOTE:
The Daytime Running Lights cannot be deacti-
vated in Canadian markets.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS
Push the multifunction lever towards the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to high
beams. The headlight switch must first be turned
to the (AUTO) or (on) position.
With high beam headlights on, the High Beam
Indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
1 — ParkSense Button
2 — Headlight Control Switch
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Rear Fog Light Button
5 — Engine Stop/Start Button
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
43
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the
(AUTO) position.
NOTE:
The function can only operate with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the (AUTO) position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlights system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of
a camera mounted on the windshield. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of
view.
This function is enabled with the radio system,
and can only be activated with the light switch
turned to (auto).
If the high beam headlights are on, the blue icon/
warning light will illuminate in the instrument
panel.
When the speed is higher than 25 mph (40 km/h)
and the function is active, the lights will turn off if
the multifunction lever is pushed again.
When the speed is lower than 15 mph (25 km/h)
and the function is active, the function switches
the high beam headlights off.
If the high beam headlights are operated quickly
again (pushing the multifunction lever towards
the instrument panel), the warning light/icon
will illuminate in the instrument panel, and the
high beam headlights will turn on constantly until
the speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) is
exceeded again, the automatic functioning is
reactivated.
If the multifunction lever is pushed again with the
Automatic High Beam Headlights activated, the
Automatic High Beam Headlights function
deactivates.
To deactivate the automatic headlight function,
rotate the headlight switch to the position.
NOTE:
If the system recognizes heavy traffic areas,
the automatic functions remain disabled
independently of the vehicle’s speed.
The Automatic High Beam functionality may
also be influenced by:
• Reflections on road signs
• Dim headlights from oncoming traffic
• Poor weather conditions
• Presence of dirt or other obstructions on
the sensor
• Damage to the windshield
PARKING LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise
to the position. All of the parking lights will turn
on for eight minutes, and opening the door
activates an audible warning.
To leave only the lights on one side (right/left)
illuminated, move the multifunction lever
(located on the left side of the steering wheel) to
the side that you want to remain on. With the
parking lights on, the indicator light on the
instrument panel will illuminate.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
HEADLIGHT OFF DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the “Headlight
Off Delay” feature will leave the headlights on for
up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning on the headlights or
side lights, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
The function can be activated from the radio
system by selecting the following functions in
sequence on the main menu:
1. Settings
2. Lights
3. Headlight Off Delay
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
REAR FOG LIGHTS
The rear fog light switch is located within the
headlight switch.
Push the button, located in the center of the
headlight switch, to turn the rear fog lights on/off.
The rear fog lights turn on only when the
headlights or parking lights are also turned on.
The lights can be turned off by pushing the
button again or by turning the headlight switch to
the O (off) position.
When the engine is stopped with the rear fog
lights on, they will be off the next time the engine
is started.
ADAPTIVE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is a system combined with Xenon headlights
(Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp, if equipped) which
directs the headlights horizontally, and contin-
uously and automatically adapts them to the driving
conditions around bends or when cornering.
The system directs the headlights to light up the
road in the best way, taking into account the
speed of the vehicle and the bend or corner
angle, as well as the speed at which the steering
wheel is turned.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated
when the vehicle is started.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate
the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the
instrument cluster flash to show proper operation.
The or turn signal will blink on the
instrument panel.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will
flash five times then automatically turn off.
To turn off the flashing before the end of the
cycle, move the lever in the opposite direction
until the first click (about half way).
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control is
rotated to its farthest upward position. The glove
compartment light turns on automatically when
the glove compartment is opened and turn off
when it is closed. The door courtesy lights
illuminate when one of the front doors is opened,
and turn off when it is closed. The liftgate
courtesy lights turn on automatically when the
liftgate is opened and turn off when it is closed.
All of these lights turn on and off regardless of the
ignition status.
FRONT MAP READING LIGHTS
The front map/reading and overhead lights are
mounted in the overhead console. Each light can
be turned on by pushing the corresponding
switch on the console. These switches are backlit
for nighttime visibility. To turn the lights off, push
the switch a second time.
Overhead Console
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, ensure that the over-
head lights are off. This will prevent the battery
from discharging once the doors are closed. If a
light is left on accidentally, the overhead lights
will turn off automatically approximately
15 minutes after the ignition has been placed in
the OFF position.
Overhead Light Timing
On certain models, to assist getting in and out of
the vehicle at night or in poorly-lit areas, two
timed modes have been provided.
1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch
2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch
3 — Overhead Lights Switch
4 — Overhead Lights On/Off When Doors Open
5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light Switch
6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light
7 — Center Reading/Map Light
8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
45
Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle — The
overhead lights turn on according to the following
modes:
Will illuminate for a few seconds when the
doors are unlocked.
Will illuminate for approximately three minutes
when one of the doors is opened.
Will illuminate for a few seconds when the
doors are locked.
Timing is interrupted when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
Three Modes Are Available For Turning Off
Overhead Lighting:
When all doors are closed after entering the
vehicle, the three-minute timer will stop and a
seconds timer will start for the interior lights.
This timing will stop when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
When doors are locked (either with key fob or
with key inserted on driver side door), the
overhead light turns off.
The interior lights will turn off after 15 minutes
to preserve the battery.
Timing While Getting Out Of The Vehicle — After
placing the ignition in the OFF position, the
overhead lights will turn on as follows:
For a few seconds after the engine stops.
For approximately three minutes when one of
the doors is opened.
For a few seconds when the last door is closed.
The timing stops automatically when the doors
are locked.
INTERIOR AMBIENT LIGHTING
The brightness of the interior passenger
compartment lights can be adjusted through the
radio system.
To access the adjustment function, on the main
menu select the following items in sequence:
1. Settings
2. Lights
3. Interior Ambient Lighting
The lights can be adjusted to seven different
levels of brightness.
REAR OVERHEAD LIGHT
The rear overhead lights are activated or
deactivated by on/off switches located on the
front overhead console or within the rear
overhead lights themselves.
Rear Overhead Light
The light turns on when a door is opened.
NOTE:
The light will turn off automatically after a few
minutes if a door is left open. To turn it on again,
open another door or close and reopen the same
door.
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
With the daytime running lights or headlights on,
push the dimmer control upward and hold to
increase the instrument panel brightness and the
control button icons. Push the dimmer control
downward and hold to decrease brightness.
Release the control when the desired brightness
level has been reached.
Dimmer Control
1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light
2 — Driver Side Rear Overhead Light
3 — Driver Side Rear Overhead Light Switch
4 — Passenger Side Rear Overhead Light Switch
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The windshield wiper stalk is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
The windshield wipers will only operate with the
ignition is placed in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotating the switch to the Low Continuous Wiper
Speed position (2) activates the first (low) level
continuous speed of the windshield wipers in
manual mode.
Rotating the switch to the High Continuous Wiper
Speed position (1) activates the second (high)
level continuous speed of the windshield wipers
in manual mode.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
Rain Sensors
Rotating the switch to the Low Sensitivity Rain
Sensing position (4), activates the first, less
sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function.
Rotating the switch to the High Sensitivity Rain
Sensing position (3), activates the second, more
sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function
Ú
page 47.
Windshield Washer
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper lever
toward the steering wheel and hold.
Both the windshield washer jet and the
windshield wiper will be activated. The wipers and
washers will continue to operate until you let go
of the lever.
The windshield wiper stops working three strokes
after the stalk is released, followed by a final
stroke six seconds later to complete the cycle.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with washer
fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see
Ú
page 202.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
“park” position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper control is turned off and the blades
cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
1 — High Continuous Wiper Speed
2 — Low Continuous Wiper Speed
3 — High Sensitivity Rain Sensing
4 — Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing
5 — Windshield Wiper Off
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
47
RAIN SENSING WIPERS
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. The Rain Sensor is located behind the
interior rearview mirror.
Rain Sensor
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four settings to activate this feature.
The sensor has an adjustment range that varies
progressively from wiper still (no stroke) when the
windshield is dry, to wiper at continuous speed
(fast operation) with intense rain.
Activation
Rotating the wiper switch to the Low Sensitivity
Rain Sensing position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain
Sensing position (3) activates the rain sensor.
The activation of the rain sensor system is done
by tapping the wiper stalk upwards while the
switch is in the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing
position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain Sensing
position (3).
The variation in sensitivity during rain sensor
operation is also signaled by a stroke of the wiper.
If the windshield washer is used with the rain
sensor activated, the normal washing cycle is
performed, and then the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic operation.
NOTE:
Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.
Deactivation
To turn off the Rain Sensing Wipers, use the wiper
switch or place the ignition in the OFF position.
In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor
while it is active, the windshield wiper operates
intermittently at a speed consistent with the
sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, whether or
not there is rain on the glass for as long as the
sensor failure is indicated on the display.
The sensor continues to operate and it is possible
to set the windshield wiper to continuous mode
(1 or 2). The failure indication remains on for as
long as the sensor is active.
The rain sensor is able to recognize and automat-
ically adjust itself in the presence of the following
conditions:
Presence of dirt on the controlled surface (e.g.
salt, dirt, etc.).
Presence of streaks of water caused by the
worn window wiper blades.
Difference between day and night.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
Push the windshield wiper lever downward to
activate/deactivate continuous rear wiper
operation.
Push the windshield wiper lever towards the
instrument panel to activate the rear window
washer (a brief push activates one washing cycle,
keeping the stalk pushed washes continuously
until the stalk is released).
Shifting the vehicle into REVERSE with the
windshield wiper operating activates a single
cycle of the rear window wiper.
HEADLAMP WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
The windshield wiper lever operates the headlight
washers when the ignition is in the ON position
and the headlights are turned on. To use the
headlight washers, pull the lever toward you and
release it. The headlight washers will spray a
timed high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto
each headlight lens. In addition, the windshield
washers will spray the windshield and the
windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE:
The headlight washers work on every tenth wash
cycle request.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located
on the touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC DUAL-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Automatic Climate Control System
1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob
2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation) 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side
3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selection Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — If Equipped
4 — Max Defrost Button 12 — Air Conditioning Button
5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — If Equipped
6 — Rear Defrost Button 14 — Driver Heated Seat Button — If Equipped
7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Selection Button 15 — Air Recirculation Button
8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
49
Automatic Climate Control System (Touchscreen Controls)
1 — Driver Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 8 — Heated Rear Window On/Off Button
2 — Driver Side Air Distribution Buttons 9 — MAX-DEF Activation/Deactivation Button (Rapid Defrosting/Demisting)
3 — Fan Speed Adjustment Button 10 — Air Recirculation On/Off Button
4 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Buttons 11 — Climate Control System Compressor On/Off Button
5 — Passenger Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 12 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)
6 — SYNC Button 13 — Climate Control System On/Off Button
7 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)
CAUTION!
The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances use R134a
and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of this system.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
Description
The Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System
adjusts the temperature and air distribution
independently between the driver and
passenger.
The system maintains the set temperature inside
the passenger compartment and compensates
for outside temperature change.
NOTE:
The reference temperature is 72°F (22°C) for
optimal comfort management.
The automatic setting will adjust the following to
maintain comfort within the passenger
compartment:
Air temperature from the driver/front
passenger side vents
Air distribution from the driver/front passenger
side vents
Fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow)
Compressor variations (for cooling/dehumid-
ifying the air)
Air recirculation
The Climate Control System can also be operated
manually by using the buttons and knobs on the
faceplate.
Manual selections will override the automatic
settings, which are stored until the AUTO button is
pushed. If the system intervenes for safety
reasons, the automatic setting will take control of
the system.
The following operations will not deactivate the
automatic (AUTO) function:
Air Recirculation activation/deactivation
A/C activation/deactivation
SYNC function activation
Rear Window Defrost activation/deactivation
When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s internal
temperature is controlled according to the set
temperature.
The following can be manually set or adjusted:
Driver/passenger air temperature
Blower speed (continuous variation)
Air distribution (seven positions for driver and
passenger)
A/C activation
Front Defroster
Air recirculation
Rear Defroster
System deactivation
A/C Compressor
Push the A/C button or the icon to activate or
deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator
illuminated when activated). The A/C compressor
will remain off even after the engine has stopped.
When the A/C compressor is turned off, the
system deactivates air recirculation to prevent
the windows from fogging up. If the climate
control system can maintain the temperature,
with the A/C turned off, the AUTO feature will
remain on and the AUTO button indicator light will
not switch off.
To restore automatic control of the A/C
compressor, push the A/C button or the icon or
the AUTO button. With the A/C compressor off,
the air speed can be set manually using the Air
Speed Adjustment Knob.
When the A/C compressor is on, and the engine
is running, air speed cannot be lower than the
minimum speed (only one indicator light is lit).
NOTE:
When the A/C is off, the Climate Control system
can not produce air that is colder than the current
outside temperature. Under certain environ-
mental conditions, windows could fog up rapidly
since the air is not dehumidified.
Air Recirculation And Air Quality System (AQS)
Air Recirculation is managed according
to the following operating mode:
Automatic engagement: indicator is
illuminated above the “A” on the Air Recircu-
lation Button
Forced activation (air circulation always
activated): indicator illuminated above the
icon on the Air Recirculation Button
Forced deactivation (air recirculation always
off with intake of outside air): both indicators
not illuminated on the Air Recirculation Button
The three operating conditions are obtained by
pushing the Air Recirculation Button in
sequence.
Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function —
If Equipped
When the automatic recirculation function is
selected, the AQS function automatically activates
internal air recirculation when the outside air is
polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).
At low external temperatures or in high humidity,
the automatic function turns off to avoid fogging
up the windows. The user can select the function
again by pushing the Air Recirculation Button.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
51
In automatic operation, air recirculation will be
controlled by the system according to outside
environmental conditions.
NOTE:
With the AQS function active and after the
internal air recirculation system has been
functioning for a set amount of time, the
Climate Control System enables air intake to
cycle the air in the passenger compartment for
a set time. The AQS function is disabled during
the air changes.
The engagement of the recirculation system
makes it possible to reach the required heating
or cooling conditions faster. It is, however,
inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it
can increase the possibility of the windows
fogging. When the outside temperature is low,
recirculation is forced off to prevent the
windows from fogging up.
Front Defrost
Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost
Push the Rear Defrost button to activate
(indicators illuminated) the Rear
Defroster.
The Rear Defrost will turn off after 20 minutes or
once the engine is turned off.
NOTE:
To avoid damage, do not apply stickers over the
interior heating filaments of the Rear Defroster.
Front Defrost And MAX-DEF Function
Push the MAX-DEF button (indicator
illuminated) to defrost the windshield
and side windows.
While in MAX-DEF function, the air conditioner
will:
Activate the air conditioner compressor when
the weather allows
Turn air recirculation off
Set the maximum air temperature (HI) on both
the driver and passenger side
Activate a blower speed based on the
temperature of the engine coolant
Adjust the air flow towards the windshield and
front side windows
Activate the Rear Window Defrost
Display the fan speed (indicators illuminated)
and current air distribution setting
NOTE:
The MAX-DEF function remains active for approx-
imately three minutes once the engine coolant
reaches the proper temperature.
When the function is on, AUTO mode will
deactivate. The only manual operations possible
are adjusting blower speed and turning off the
Rear Window Defrost.
Pushing the Air Recirculation button switches
off the MAX-DEF function.
Air Temperature Adjustment
Rotate the driver or passenger Temperature
Adjustment Knob clockwise for warmer
temperatures or counterclockwise for cooler
temperatures. The set temperatures are shown
on the radio system.
Push the SYNC button to sync the driver and
passenger air temperatures.
Rotate the passenger Temperature Adjustment
Knob to cancel the SYNC function. This will set a
new passenger side temperature.
Rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob fully
clockwise to engage the HI (maximum heating)
setting or fully counterclockwise to engage the LO
(maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate these
functions, rotate the Temperature Adjustment
Knob to the desired temperature.
Rear passengers’ temperature is linked to driver
side selection.
AUTO Button
When the AUTO button is pushed (indicator
illuminated), the Climate Control system automat-
ically adjusts the following settings:
Quantity and distribution of air flow in the
passenger compartment
The air conditioner
Air recirculation
Cancels any manual settings
Selecting the AUTO function illuminates the
indicator on the A/C button.
If air distribution or the fan speed is manually
adjusted, the AUTO button indicator will turn off to
indicate that the Climate Control system is no
longer in AUTO mode.
After a manual adjustment, push the AUTO button
to resume the automatic system.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
SYNC Button
Push the SYNC button (indicator illuminated) to
sync the passenger side air temperature with the
driver side air temperature.
This function makes temperature regulation
easier when the driver is traveling alone.
Turn the passenger Temperature Adjustment
Knob or push the passenger side Air Distribution
Selection Button to change the passenger side
air temperature and return to separate air
temperature management.
Blower Speed
Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase or
decrease the blower speed. The speed is
displayed with lighted indicators in the radio
system display.
Maximum fan speed = all indicators
illuminated on the radio system display
Minimum fan speed = one indicator
illuminated on the radio system display
The fan can be turned off by rotating the Blower
Speed Knob counterclockwise to the off position
(all segments on the radio system display are
turned off).
NOTE:
To restore automatic control of the fan speed,
push the AUTO button.
Air Distribution Selection
Push the Air Distribution Selection button on the
faceplate to change the mode of air distribution.
NOTE:
In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls automati-
cally manage the air distribution. When set manu-
ally, the respective symbols on the radio system
indicate the air distribution setting.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel to ventilate the chest
and face. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or
side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is
a shut-off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets. This setting heats the
passenger compartment the quickest.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Front Defrost And Panel Mode
Air flow is distributed between the
windshield demisting/defrosting vents
and side/central dashboard vents. This
setting allows air to flow to the
windshield on sunny days.
Front Defrost And Bi-Level Mode
Air flow is distributed to all vents.
Switching The Climate Control System On/Off
To Turn Off The Climate Control System
Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob
completely counterclockwise to turn off the
Climate Control system.
With the air conditioner is off:
Air recirculation is on
The A/C compressor is off
The fan is off
The heated rear window can be activated/
deactivated
NOTE:
The Climate Control system stores the previously
set temperatures and resumes operation when
any button on the system is pushed.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
53
To Turn On The Climate Control System
To switch the Climate Control system on in
automatic mode, push the AUTO button.
Operating Mode
The Climate Control system can be activated in
different ways. It is recommended to use the
automatic function. Push the AUTO button and
set the desired temperatures.
The automatic system adjusts the temperature,
quantity, and distribution of air introduced into
the passenger compartment. It also controls air
recirculation and the activation of the air
conditioner.
At any time during automatic operation, you can
change the temperature, activate or deactivate
the Rear Defrost, activate SYNC, activate or
deactivate the air conditioner, and activate or
deactivate air recirculation. The system will
automatically adjust to the new settings.
Climate Control Display Settings
The Climate Control settings are visible on the
radio screen.
The display on the radio system is a pop up
window, which is activated by pushing the
buttons or turning the knobs on the Climate
Control system. The indicator lights located on
the buttons and knobs indicate that the selected
feature is on/off. If no operation is performed for
a predetermined time, the pop-up will close on
the display.
Humidity Sensor
The Humidity Sensor helps prevent the windows
from fogging up. The AUTO function (indicator
illuminated) must be on for the Humidity Sensor
to function.
When outside temperature is low, the system may
turn the compressor on and turn air recirculation
off for safer driving.
Stop/Start
The Stop/Start system shuts off the engine when
the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), as a fuel
conservation measure.
In order to maintain comfort in the cabin, the
Stop/Start feature will not activate if any of the
following conditions exist:
The Climate Control system is in AUTO mode
(indicator illuminated), and the vehicle has yet
to reach the set temperature
The Climate Control system is in LO maximum
cooling
The Climate Control system is in HI maximum
heating
The Climate Control system is in the MAX-DEF
status
When the Stop/Start system is active, the engine
will restart if the inside temperature changes
significantly, or if the LO setting, or MAX-DEF
setting, is activated.
With Stop/Start system on (engine is OFF), air
flow is reduced to keep the compartment comfort
conditions for longer.
Until the temperature drastically changes within
the cabin, the climate control system will
continue to maintain the temperature while the
engine is off. By deactivating the Stop/Start
system with the button (located by the
headlight switch), the climate control system
operates normally according to the settings.
NOTE:
In harsh climate conditions, limit the use of the
Stop/Start system to prevent the compressor
from continuously switching on and off. This
will cause rapid misting of the windows and the
accumulation of humidity in the passenger
compartment.
When the Stop/Start system is on, the climate
control system will always take air in from
outside, reducing the probability of the
windows fogging up.
System Maintenance
In winter months, the Climate Control system
must be turned on at least once a month for
approximately 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer before the summer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
54
INTERIOR STORAGE AND
EQUIPMENT
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Opening The Glove Compartment
Pull the release handle to open the glove
compartment.
When the glove compartment is opened, a light
turns on to illuminate the inside of the
compartment.
NOTE:
If equipped with a lock, unlock the glove
compartment by placing the emergency key in
the lock on the handle.
Do not insert large objects that will prevent the
glove compartment from closing completely.
CENTER CONSOLE
The center console storage compartment is
located between the front seats.
To access the center console storage, lift the
upper part of the center console as shown below.
Center Console
REAR ARMREST
The rear armrest is foldable and can be stored in
the backrest.
To lower the armrest, pull on the tab located at
the top of the seatback and fold it downward.
To close the armrest, lift it until it is inserted
into the backrest.
There are two cupholders and a phone
compartment inside the armrest.
Rear Cupholder
NOTE:
The armrest was not designed to support the
weight of an adult passenger or a child. Only use
it to hold drinks or small objects.
POWER OUTLETS
The Instrument Panel Power Outlet is located on
the center stack under the climate controls. It will
only operate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
55
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
NOTE:
Do not connect devices, with a power rating
higher than 180 W, to the outlet. Do not use
power adapters that do not fit the outlet as this
may damage it.
Luggage Compartment Power Outlet
There is an additional power outlet located on the
left side of the luggage compartment. It will only
operate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
Luggage Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
Do not connect devices with powers higher than
150 W to the socket. Do not damage the outlet by
using unsuitable adapters.
115 Volt Power Inverter — If Equipped
The power inverter is located inside of the center
console. It can be used for small battery-powered
electrical appliances with powers up to 150 W
(e.g. cameras, video camera, tablets, razors,
etc.).
NOTE:
Do not connect devices with powers higher than
150 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket
by using unsuitable adapters.
Power Inverter
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH TRAY —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped, the cigar lighter is located on the
bottom of the center stack, in front of the
cupholders.
To activate the cigar lighter, push in and wait a
few seconds. Once the cigar lighter has returned
to its original position, it is ready for use.
NOTE:
Always ensure the cigar lighter is turned off when
not in use.
1 — Cigar Lighter
If equipped, the ash tray is a removable plastic
container located inside the cupholder.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
E
QUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15 W (3 A)
Qi wireless charging pad located inside of the
center console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
56
Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to
transfer power to your mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging.
NOTE:
Do not place the key fob or any other type of
metal/magnetized object inside the mobile
phone housing or near the wireless charging
pad.
Be sure to place the mobile device correctly
(display facing upward) on the wireless
charging pad.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in
order for the phone to charge.
To avoid interference with the key fob search,
the wireless charging pad will stop charging
when any door is opened.
The following messages will display in the radio
system:
“Your phone is being charged” — The phone
has begun to charge.
“Phone Fully Charged” — The phone has
completed charging its battery.
“Foreign Object Detected” — The phone is not
enabled for wireless charging or an object that
is not permitted has been placed on the
wireless charging pad.
“Unavailable System” — There is a malfunction
with the wireless charging pad.
The driver can deactivate these messages
through the radio system. Refer to the
Information and Entertainment System Owner’s
Manual Supplement for further information.
POWER WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window switches work with the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position and for three
minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. When one of the front doors is
opened, this operation is disabled.
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release. Push
past the detent to activate “continuous
automatic” operation.
If the button is pushed again, the window will stop
in the desired position.
Pull the window switch to the first detent to move
the window upward. Pull the window switch to the
second detent, and the window will go up
automatically.
To close the window, pull the window switch up.
To stop the window during Auto-Up operation,
push or pull the window switch again.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
1 — Front Left Window Switch
2 — Front Right Window Switch
3 — Rear Right Window Switch
4 — Window Lockout Switch
5 — Rear Left Window Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
57
AUTO-UP FEATURE WITH ANTI-PINCH
P
ROTECTION
The vehicle is equipped with an anti-pinch safety
device for closing the windows.
If the safety system senses any obstacle while the
window is closing, it will stop the window’s
movement and reverse it, depending on its
position.
This device is also useful if the windows are
activated accidentally by children inside the
vehicle.
The anti-pinch safety function is activated both
during the manual and the automatic operation
of the window.
When the anti-pinch system is activated, the
window closing is immediately interrupted. Then
the window closing is automatically reversed and
the window lowers by about 8 inches (20 cm) in
relation to the first stop position. The window
cannot be operated during this time.
NOTE:
In the event of an error, or if the anti-pinch protec-
tion is activated three consecutive times, the
automatic closing operation of the window will be
deactivated. In order to restore the correct opera-
tion of the system, the window must be lowered.
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
If power supply is interrupted, the electric window
automatic operation must be reinitialized.
To perform the initialization procedure, which
must be done on each door with the doors closed,
manually fully close the window to be initialized.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof consists of a single glass
panel and is fitted with a power sunshade the full
length of the panel.
Operation of the sunroof is only possible with the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position
Ú
page 22.
Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons
The sunroof has three preset positions:
Fully closed
Comfort (intermediate opening)
Fully open
NOTE:
You cannot have the sunshade closed when the
sunroof is open.
1 — Power Shade Open/Close
2 — Sunroof Open/Close Button
3 — Vent Open/Close
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
58
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
To open the sunroof’s front panel, push the
open/close button toward the rear of the vehicle
to open to the comfort position (half way).
Pushing the button a second time will open to the
fully open position.
To close the sunroof, push the open/close button
toward the front of the vehicle. The roof will close
completely.
The automatic motion can be interrupted in any
position by pushing the open/close button again.
VENTING SUNROOF
To bring the roof into vent position, push and
release the vent button.
This type of vent opening can be activated
regardless of the position of the sunroof. When
starting with the roof in the closed position,
pushing the vent button automatically causes the
sunroof to open to the vent position. If the roof is
already open, the button must be held until the
roof reaches the vent-opening position.
Pushing the vent button again during automatic
movement of the roof will stop it.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade is power operated.
Push the Power Shade open/close button toward
the rear of the vehicle to open the sun shade.
Push the Power Shade open/close button toward
the front of the vehicle to close the sun shade.
The automatic motion can be interrupted in any
position by pushing the Power Shade open/close
button again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety system
capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle
during the closing movement. If an obstacle is
detected, the system intervenes and the
movement of the sunroof is immediately reversed.
RE-INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Automatic operation of the sunroof must be
re-initialized in case of faulty sunroof operation. It
may also be necessary to initialize the sunroof
after the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected
and then reconnected.
NOTE:
The anti-pinch safety device is deactivated during
the re-initialization procedure.
Proceed as follows:
1. With the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
make sure the sunroof glass is fully closed
(sunshade open).
2. Open the driver’s side door, and place the
ignition in the OFF position.
3. Within five seconds, place the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
4. Within 10 seconds, push and hold the
sunroof close switch (forward). After
8 -10 seconds of holding the switch, the
re-initialization process will begin. Continue
to hold the switch while the sunroof motor
cycles, and the sunshade will fully close.
5. Once the sunroof glass and the power
sunshade have stopped motion, release the
sunroof close switch, then push and hold it
again within five seconds. Continue to hold
the switch while the sunshade fully opens,
the sunroof glass fully opens, followed by the
glass fully closing then the sunshade fully
closing.
6. Release the switch once all of the operations
stop. Re-initialization of the sunroof motors is
now complete.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not
leave the Keyless Push Button Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
CAUTION!
Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or
crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun roof
if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
59
NOTE:
If the switch is released prior to full completion of
the operations described, the entire re-initializa-
tion procedure must be repeated from step 1.
7. Confirm express operations for the sunroof
glass and sunshade are functional for
opening and closing operations.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have collected
in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Lift the hood slightly. Move the underhood
latch from right to left to release the hood.
Hood Latch Location
3. Raise the hood completely. The operation is
assisted by the addition of two gas props
which hold it in the open position.
NOTE:
Do not tamper with the props and assist the
hood while lifting it.
Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting,
check that the windshield wiper arms are not
raised from the windshield or in operation.
Also, ensure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the Electric Park Brake is engaged.
CLOSING THE HOOD
To close, lower the hood to approximately
16 inches (40 cm) from the engine compartment
then let it drop. Make sure that the hood is
completely closed and fully latched.
NOTE:
Since the hood is equipped with a double locking
system, one for each side, you must check that it
is closed on each side.
POWER LIFTGATE
Unlocking of the liftgate is electrically operated
and is deactivated when the vehicle is in motion.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
OPENING
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Pressing the liftgate release button on the key
fob twice within five seconds
Pushing the external liftgate release switch
(when the liftgate is unlocked)
Lifting the interior liftgate release button on
the driver’s door panel trim
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60
External Liftgate Release Switch
Interior Liftgate Release
The turn signal indicators will blink and the
interior lights will turn on when the liftgate is
opened. They turn off automatically when the
liftgate is closed.
The lights turn off automatically after a few
minutes if the liftgate is left open.
A signal will chime while the liftgate is opening or
closing.
NOTE:
You can stop the liftgate from moving by pushing
the interior liftgate release button again.
Liftgate Emergency Opening
There is a panel on the luggage compartment
interior trim, next to the liftgate lock, accessible
by folding down the rear seat backrest, which
allows access to the manual lock release.
Manual Lock Release Location
Pull to release the lock.
Manual Lock Release Cord
The liftgate can now be opened manually.
CLOSING
It is possible to close the liftgate by pushing:
The power liftgate switch.
The power lock switch located on the liftgate
(all the doors, including the liftgate, will be
locked).
The liftgate button on the key fob twice.
The power liftgate switch on the liftgate.
The power liftgate switch on the driver’s door
panel trim and hold until the operation is
complete.
Power Liftgate/Lock Switches
NOTE:
It is possible to stop the liftgate from moving with
any of the Power Liftgate switches.
1 — Interior Liftgate Release Switch
1 — Power Liftgate Switch
2 — Power Door Lock Switch
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
61
Customizing The Liftgate Opening Height
To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, you can set
the height at which the liftgate opens to.
To customize the liftgate opening position, follow
the steps below:
1. Open the liftgate manually and move it to the
position that you want the liftgate to open to.
2. Press and hold one of the closing buttons for
at least five seconds (successful program-
ming is indicated by the turn signals flashing
three times).
The liftgate is now programmed to open to the set
position.
This function can be selected on the radio
system.
To set the liftgate opening height, refer to the
Information and Entertainment System Owner’s
Manual Supplement for further information.
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
To operate the Hands-Free Liftgate system:
1. If the doors are locked, the system must
detect the key fob near the liftgate.
2. If the doors are unlocked, the system does
not have to detect the key fob near the lift-
gate.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle, in the center and
about 3 feet (1 m) from the liftgate.
4. Move your foot under the bumper, simulating
a kick. When you have completed this move-
ment, withdraw your leg. To activate the lift-
gate, both sensors must detect your leg.
Hands Free Liftgate Activation Zone
If it is closed, the Hands-Free Liftgate unlocks and
opens completely, and with another movement of
the foot, it stops. A further movement of the foot
reverses the direction and closes the liftgate
completely, if you do not stop it again.
If it is open, with a movement of the foot, the
Hands-Free Liftgate closes completely, and with
another movement of the foot, it stops. If the
liftgate is stopped, another movement of the foot
will reverse the direction and open it completely.
NOTE:
To conserve the battery charge, avoid performing
this operation repeatedly with the engine off.
You can activate/deactivate the Hands-Free
Liftgate on the radio system by pushing the MENU
button to select the Main menu, and selecting the
following items:
1. Settings
2. Doors And Locks
3. Automatic Liftgate Opening
LIFTGATE INITIALIZATION
NOTE:
Automatic operation of the liftgate must be initial-
ized again in case of faulty liftgate operation.
Proceed as follows:
1. Close all the doors and the liftgate.
2. Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set
at high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate can be turned off
manually in the radio system to avoid uninten-
tional activation. For further information refer
to the Information and Entertainment System
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
62
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Retractable Cargo Area Cover
The Retractable Cargo Area Cover can be rolled
up and removed.
To Use The Cargo Area Cover:
1. From the rolled up (retracted) position, hold
the handle and pull the cover outward toward
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Then assist the cover pins into the slots
located just inside the liftgate opening.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Removing The Cover:
1. Retract the cover by pulling the handle
slightly rearward to release the cover pins.
2. Guide the cover forward until it is fully
retracted.
3. Pull the two cover hooks (one on each side)
towards the inside of the cargo area. Then lift
the cover up and remove it.
Cover Attached
Rear Cargo Anchors
The cargo area floor may be equipped with fixed
or mobile anchoring loops that allow you to
anchor and secure luggage safely.
The fixed anchor loops are located in the four
corners of the cargo floor.
Anchor Loops
Cargo Area Adjustable Rail — If Equipped
The mobile loops (if equipped), slide on two
guides secured to the cargo area floor.
To position a loop, push down the center button
while sliding the loop along the guide to the
desired position. Release the button and move
the loop slightly to the next fixed position in the
notches on the guide.
Adjustable Anchor Loop — If Equipped
1 — Handle
2 — Cover Pins
3 — Cover Hook
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the
vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around
in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the
cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.
Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
63
Lift the loop to fasten the load.
Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop To Use
Cargo Net — If Equipped
Cargo nets can be used to contain lightweight
materials during transport.
The cargo net is included in the optional
“Convenience Package” and is available from an
authorized dealer.
Grocery Hooks
Two hooks (one on the left side and one on the
right side) are also available on the side panels to
fix loads that are not excessively heavy (e.g.
bags).
Grocery Hook
NOTE:
Do not apply a load greater than 22 lb (10 kg) on
a single hook.
Accessing The Tire Service Kit —
If Equipped
To access the Tire Service Kit
Ú
page 181, lift up
the load floor by the handle.
Load Floor
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This section gives you all the information you need to understand and use the instrument panel correctly.
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
65
Quadrifoglio Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
• Inside the tachometer there is a light
sensor capable of detecting ambient light
conditions and adjusting the operating
mode (night/day) and the brightness of the
instrument panel and the Information and
Entertainment System display.
2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
• The digital bar indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine
oil and starts
supplying indications when the fluid
temperature reaches approximately
122°F (50°C).
• Under normal usage, the digital scale
should hover around the middle of the
scale according to the working conditions.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You
or others could be badly burned by steam or
boiling coolant. It is recommended to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats
Ú
page 204.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
66
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display
Ú
page 66.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The digital bar gauge shows the amount of
fuel in the tank.
• The fuel reserve/limited range warning
light turns on, a message is displayed and
there is an acoustic signal when about 2.4
gallons (9 liters) of fuel are left in the tank.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
lo
cated.
• Proceeding further, the second white
notch will go off and the last one will
become red, together with the indication
"E" present at the bottom of the tank.
Fuel Level Gauge
NOTE:
If the low fuel warning light switches on, refuel at
the earliest opportunity.
5. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
D
ESCRIPTION
This vehicle is equipped with a driver interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
When one or more of the doors have been
opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF
position, the instrument cluster will display the
vehicle mileage for a few seconds.
RECONFIGURABLE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ISPLAY
During operation, the instrument cluster display
is divided into multiple sections which show
driving data, warnings, and failure indications.
Instrument Cluster Display
RECONFIGURABLE DISPLAY ITEMS
1. External Lights (Low Beam/High Beam)
Display
2. Front, Side Anti-Collision Systems, Cruise
Control Change Information
3. Speed Limiter Display
4. Driving Assistance Systems
(FCW, LDW, LKA, HAS) Information Display
5. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) / Cruise
Control (CC) Information Display
6. Traffic Sign Information (TSI) / Speed Limiter
Information Display
7. Traffic Sign Information (TSI) Information
Display
8. Time
9. External Temperature
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
67
10. Main Display: Vehicle Speed Display, Trip
Computer Information, etc.
The screens can be selected, on rotation, by
pushing the MENU selection button on the
windshield wiper stalk.
MENU Selection Button
Depending on the driving mode chosen using
the Alfa Dynamic, Natural, and Advanced Effi-
ciency (DNA) the screens can be graphically
different. Navigation instructions and call in-
formation can be set and displayed in the In-
formation and Entertainment System.
Home
The parameters shown on the display, for the
modes: Dynamic, Natural and Advanced Effi-
ciency are:
• Time
• Outside Temperature
• Current speed (shown only if the repeat
mode of the “Navigation” and “Phone”
functions have not been previously acti-
vated).
• Range
In RACE mode (if equipped) the consumption
indication index is not active and a sports
gearshift indicator is displayed.
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display
Trip A And B
For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, and
Advanced Efficiency) and with the ignition de-
vice ON, the “Trip computer” can be used to
display the measurements regarding the op-
erating state of the vehicle. This function is
characterized by two separate records, called
“Trip A” and “Trip B” (the latter can be deacti-
vated by Information and Entertainment Sys-
tem), where the “complete missions”
(journeys) are recorded in a reciprocally inde-
pendent manner.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the
values relating to:
• Distance traveled
• Average fuel consumption
• Average speed
• Active trip
• Fuel consumption indicator
Instrument Cluster Display
To reset the values, press and hold down the
button on the windshield wiper stalk.
1 — Time
2 — Temperature
3 — Distance To Empty
4 — Speed
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
68
Performance
The displayed parameters differ according to
the active mode. The modes which can be se-
lected using the Alfa DNA system are:
Natural
Efficiency Consumption Graph
The screen graphically reproduces some pa-
rameters closely linked to the efficiency of
the driving style, with a view to limiting con-
sumption.
Advanced Efficiency
Dynamic Driving Style
The three central icons on the screen indi-
cate the effectiveness of the driving style
linked to the parameters of: acceleration, de-
celeration and gearshift with a view to reduc-
ing fuel consumption.
The graphic bar below the icons shows cur-
rent consumption and the green line rep-
resents the optimal area. The globe lights up
gradually according to lower consumption.
Alternative Performance
The displayed parameters vary depending on
the active mode. The modes can be selected
through the Alfa DNA system and are as fol-
lows:
Natural and Advanced Efficiency
The display graphically shows the values of:
• instantaneous consumption
• average fuel consumption (based on
“Trip A”);
Below a certain speed value, when the accel-
erator pedal is not pressed or in the event of
failure, dashes are displayed in place of the
consumption value ("– –. –").
Natural and Advanced Efficiency
Dynamic
The display graphically shows the values of:
• accelerator pedal position (expressed in
percentage);
• brake pedal position (expressed in
percentage);
• engine coolant temperature (H = hot/
C = cold).
Dynamic
1 — Acceleration
2 — Deceleration
3 — Gear Shifts
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
69
Race (If Equipped)
The display graphically shows the values of:
• engine torque;
• turbocharger pressure;
• engine oil pressure (L = low pressure/
H= high pressure).
NOTE:
The engine torque and turbocharger pressure
values vary according to the engine type.
Race
Dynamic
Acceleration Gauge
The displayed parameters are related to vehi-
cle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of
the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-me-
ter information), considering gravity accelera-
tion as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated.
11. Driving Mode Display (Alfa DNA System)
12. Distance Traveled (miles/km) display
13. Fuel Consumption
14. Warning Indications Display (e.g. danger of
ice, open doors, ABS operation, etc.)
15. Range
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS
Multiple settings can be programmed by the user
using the radio. This section describes only the
basic settings:
Units & Language
Clock & Date
Cluster
To access the settings list in the radio, proceed as
follows:
Press the Home button to access the main
menu.
Select Settings from the main menu using the
Rotary Knob or by pressing Settings on the
touchscreen.
Rotary Knob
Units & Language
The following settings can be modified under the
“Units & Language” menu:
Units: select US, Metric, or Custom. The
custom option allows for individual selection of
the unit measures
Language: change the language of the system
Restore Unit & Language Settings: restores the
factory settings
To access and the change the setting, turn and
push the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting
on the touchscreen.
1 — ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob
2 — OPTION Button
3 — Rotary Pad
4 — Home Button
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
70
Clock & Date
The following settings can be modified under the
“Clock & Date” menu:
Sync With GPS Time: activates or deactivates
the clock synchronization through the GPS. If
the function is deactivated, the options Set
Time and Set Date are enabled.
Set Time: set the time manually.
Time Format: set the time format to either a
12-hour or a 24-hour clock.
Set Date: set the date manually.
Restore Clock & Date Settings: restores the
factory settings.
To access and change the setting, turn and push
the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting on the
touchscreen.
Cluster
The following settings can be modified under the
“Cluster” menu:
Warning Buzzer Volume: set the volume of the
warning buzzer on seven levels.
Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip function.
Show Phone Info: activate/deactivate
repetition of the phone function screens also
on the instrument cluster display.
Show Audio Info: activate/deactivate
repetition of the audio function screens (Radio
and Media) also on the instrument cluster
display.
Show Nav Info: activate/deactivate repetition
of the navigator function screens also on the
instrument cluster display.
Digital Speed on all screens: activate/deacti-
vating of digital speed on the instrument
cluster display screens other than the main
screen.
Consumption Bar: activate/deactivate the
consumption baron the display screens of the
instrument panel where it is available.
Performance Pages: choose, for each driving
mode, one of the two alternative contents
displayed in the screen.
Custom Areas: select which content to display
in each of the three customizable areas on the
display of the instrument panel: time, date,
outside temperature, radio information,
compass.
Restore Cluster Settings: deletes the current
settings and restores the factory settings.
To access and the change the setting, turn and
push the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting
on the touchscreen.
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following pages consist of warning lights and
messages.
NOTE:
The warning light turns on together with a
dedicated message and/or chime when
applicable. These indications are precau-
tionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
section in the event of a failure indication.
The failure indicators appearing on the display
are divided into two categories: very serious
and less serious faults. Serious faults are
indicated by a repeated and prolonged
warning cycle. Less serious faults are
indicated by a warning cycle with a shorter
duration. You can stop the warning cycle in
both cases by pushing the button located on
the windshield wiper stalk. The instrument
panel warning light will stay on until the cause
of the failure is eliminated.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the air bag has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
71
(Continued)
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an
EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the
ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Failure
The simultaneous turning on of the
BRAKE (red) and (amber) warning
lights with the engine on indicates either
a failure of the EBD system or that the
system is not available. In this case, the rear
wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may
swerve when braking abruptly.
Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized
dealer to have the system inspected immediately.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil
temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon
as possible. If the problem persists, contact an
authorized dealer.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
and the light will turn on. When driving,
if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú
page 151.
WARNING!
The fault of the warning light is signaled by the
turning on of the icon on the instrument panel.
In this case, the warning light may not indicate
any faults with the restraint systems. Before
proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to
have the system checked immediately.
If the warning light does not turn on when the
ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on
when driving (together with the message on the
display), there might be a fault in the restraint
systems; in this case, the air bags or preten-
sioners may not deploy in the event of an
accident or, in a lower number of cases, they
could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding,
contact an authorized dealer to have the
system checked immediately.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72
AMBER WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This light monitors the ABS. The light will
turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake
indicator light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does
not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, but should
turn off as soon as the engine is started.
ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the
system is indicated by the flashing of the
indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in
critical stability and grip conditions.
ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not
turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running,
a failure was found in the ESC system.
Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination
of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist
system failure.
In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, but should
turn off as soon as the engine is started.
The indicator light illuminates to indicate that
some active safety systems have been partially or
totally deactivated
Ú
page 135.
When the active safety systems are reactivated,
the indicator light turns off.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)
In normal conditions, when the ignition
is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but it should turn off as
soon as the engine is started.
The operation of the indicator light may be
checked by the traffic police using specific
devices. Comply with the laws and regulations of
the country where you are driving.
Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue
traveling at moderate speed but without
demanding excessive effort from the engine or
high speed. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the
indicator light on constantly may cause damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
This indicator light informs the driver
that the frontal collision alarm function
is not enabled.
Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The fault of the warning light is signaled by
the turning on of the icon on the instrument
panel. In this case, the warning light may not
indicate any faults with the restraint
systems. Before proceeding, contact an
authorized dealer to have the system
checked immediately.
If the warning light does not turn on when the
ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on
when driving (together with the message on
the display), there might be a fault in the
restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or
pretensioners may not deploy in the event of
an accident or, in a lower number of cases,
they could deploy erroneously. Before
proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to
have the system checked immediately.
CAUTION!
If, turning the ignition device to ON, the
warning light does not turn on or if it turns
on steadily or flashing when traveling (on
some versions together with the message on
the display), contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
73
Fuel Reserve/Limited Range
The indicator light (or the symbol in the
display) illuminates when about 2.4
gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.
Rear Fog Lights
The indicator illuminates when the rear
fog light is activated.
Tire Pressure Low Warning Light
The indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the tire pressure is lower
than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In
these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
In any situation in which the message on the
display is “See Manual”
Ú
page 149.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
If the warning light or the icon on the display
flashes while driving, contact an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit
and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
74
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the automatic high beam headlights are
activated.
Left Turn Signal Indicator Light
The instrument cluster directional arrow
will flash independently for the left turn
signal as selected, as well as the
exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and
rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left). This directional arrow will
flash in conjunction with the right directional
arrow when the hazard warning light button is
pushed.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned
on.
Right Turn Signal Indicator Light
The instrument cluster directional arrow
will flash independently for the right
turn signal as selected, as well as the
exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and
rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is
moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash
in conjunction with the left directional arrow
when the hazard warning light button is pushed.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the high beam
headlights are on. Push the
multifunction control lever away from
you to switch the headlights to high
beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash
to pass” scenario.
RED SYMBOLS
Alfa Steering Torque (AST) Failure
The switching on of the telltale signals a
failure in the automatic steering
correction system.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
Alternator Failure
The switching on of the telltale with
engine on corresponds to an alternator
failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Automatic Transmission Failure
The telltale turns on, together with a
buzzer warning, to indicate that the
automatic transmission is faulty.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Disc Temperature
When the symbol turns on, it indicates
an excessive temperature of the brake
discs. Let the breaking system cool
down by reducing the speed.
Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System
Activation
The symbol appears, together with a
message on the display, in case of
activation of the DAA system.
Stop to pause while driving, pulling the car over in
safe conditions.
WARNING!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable sys-
tem operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after-
market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
CAUTION!
Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may
severely damage the gearbox, with resulting
breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact
with hot engine or with exhaust components
at high temperature could cause fires.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
75
Door Open
The telltale turns on when one or more
doors are not completely shut. An
acoustic signal is activated with the
doors open and the car moving.
Close the doors properly.
Power Steering Failure
If the telltale remains on, you may not
have steering assistance and the effort
required to operate the steering wheel
may be increased; steering is, however,
possible.
NOTE:
After the battery is disconnected, the steering
wheel must be initialized. The Power Steering
Failure light on the instrument panel will illumi-
nate to indicate this. To carry out this procedure,
simply turn the steering wheel all the way from
one end to the other, and then turn it back to the
central position.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light, along with the related
message, signals a failure in the ETC.
If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on
while the engine is running.
Place the gear selector in the Park (P) position and
the ignition in the off position: the warning light
should switch off. If the warning light stays on with
engine running, the vehicle can still be driven.
If the warning light flashes with the engine
running, immediate intervention is required. A
loss of performance, irregular/high idling speed
or engine stopping might take place and the
vehicle may need to be towed.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the failure eliminated.
Engine Coolant Temperature Too High
The telltale lights up when the engine
has overheated.
In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off
the engine and check that the coolant level in the
reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case,
wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and
carefully open the cap, fill with coolant and check
that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks
on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any
fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the
telltale comes on when the engine is started
again.
If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions
(e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down
and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle.
Stop for two or three minutes with the engine
running and slightly accelerated to facilitate
better coolant circulation, then turn the engine
off. Check that the coolant level is correct as
described above.
Hood Cap Not Properly Shut
The telltale turns on when the hood cap
is not properly closed, along with the
icon, an image of the vehicle with an
open hood cap appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and
the vehicle is moving.
Close the hood properly.
Insufficient Engine Oil Level
The telltale turns on, along with the
related message on the display, to
indicate low engine oil level.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
This telltale indicates low engine oil
pressure. If the telltale turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate
the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine.
NOTE:
Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been
solved. The turning on of the telltale does not indi-
cate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level
can be checked on the display upon entering the
vehicle and also by activating the “Oil level” func-
tion on the Information and Entertainment
System.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol
switches on when driving, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
76
Liftgate Not Properly Shut
The telltale turns on when the liftgate is
not properly closed, along with the icon,
an image of the vehicle with an open
liftgate appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the liftgate is open and
the vehicle is moving.
Close the liftgate properly.
AMBER SYMBOLS
ABS Activation
This telltale will illuminate to indicate
that the ABS system has activated.
Adaptive Front Lighting System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to indicate the
automatic directional light system failure.
Go to an authorized dealer to have the
system checked.
All Wheel Drive Failure
This telltale will illuminate along with an
accompanying message when the AWD
dynamic control system is temporarily
deactivated to prevent damage. The
traction system will work in RWD mode in this
instance.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the failure eliminated.
Audio System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to report a
failure of the audio system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the failure eliminated.
Automatic High Beam Headlights
Failure — If Equipped
The telltale will illuminate to report a
failure of the automatic high beam
headlights.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the failure eliminated.
Blind Spot Monitoring System Failure —
If Equipped
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
a Blind Spot Monitoring system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System
Failure
The symbol comes on in the event of a
DAA system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible to have the failure eliminated.
Dusk Sensor Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
failure of the automatic low beam
alignment.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Dynamic Drive Control System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to signal a
failure in the dynamic drive control
system.
Electric Park Brake Failure
The telltale will illuminate and a
message will display to signal a failure
in the electric park brake system.
This failure may partially or completely block the
vehicle because the park brake could remain
activated even if automatically or manually
disengaged using the relevant controls. In these
circumstances, you can disengage the park
brake following the emergency disengagement
procedure
Ú
page 84.
If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake
is not engaged), drive to the nearest authorized
dealer and remember, when executing any
maneuvers/commands, that the electric park
brake is not operational.
Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-In
Attempt
Engine Immobilizer System Failure The
telltale will illuminate to report a failure
of the Engine Immobilizer system.
Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when
the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a
possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm
system.
Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will
illuminate when the engine is started and the
electronic key is not recognized by the system.
WARNING!
If a failure is present with sharp braking, the
rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may
swerve.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
77
Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to
report an alarm system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Exterior Lights Failure
The telltale will illuminate to indicate a
failure on the following lights: Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) / parking lights /
trailer turn signal indicators (if present) /
trailer lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal
indicators / rear fog light / reversing light / brake
lights / license plate lights.
The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a
blown protection fuse, or an interruption of the
electrical connection.
Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Change Required —
If Equipped
The telltale is illuminated only for a
limited time.
NOTE:
After the first indication, each time the engine is
started the symbol will continue to illuminate as
described above until the oil is changed.
If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that
there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply
reports that it is now necessary to change the oil
as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The
deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using
the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine
from reaching operating temperature.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Level Sensor Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
engine oil level sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
engine oil pressure sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Fuel Cut-Off System Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
fuel cut-off system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Fuel Cut-Off Indicator Light
The telltale will illuminate after an
accident has occurred and the system
has shut the fuel off.
For reactivating the fuel cut-off system
Ú
page 151. If it is not possible to restore the fuel
supply, contact an authorized dealer.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
fuel level sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Generic Indication
Signals information and failures.
The accompanying messages describe the
failure.
Highway Assist System (HAS)/Traffic Jam
Assist (TJA) System Failure
The symbol lights up in case of HAS or
TJA system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible to have the failure eliminated.
Keyless System Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
keyless system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System
Failure — If Equipped
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
a fault in the Lane Departure Warning
system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as
soon as possible after the symbol is switched
on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km)
after it first switches on. Failure to observe the
above may result in severe damage to the
engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does
not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so
if it flashes you do not need to top up the
engine oil.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
78
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or
not properly closed.
Tighten the cap properly.
Low Coolant Level — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle coolant level is low.
Windshield Washer Liquid Level
The telltale will illuminate to indicate
that the level of the windshield and
headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.
Always use liquid with the features indicated in
the “Fluids And Lubricants”
Ú
page 198.
Park Sensors System Failure
The telltale will illuminate when the
system has failed or is not available.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
Rain Sensor Failure
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
failure of the automatic windshield wiper.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
System
This light will illuminate when the ACC is
not operating and needs service.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
Shock Absorbers Failure
While driving, if the telltale illuminates,
it signals a failure in the suspension
system.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
Failure — If Equipped
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
failure of the Forward Collision Warning
system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Stop/Start System Failure
This telltale will illuminate to report a
Stop/Start system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the failure eliminated.
Soft Suspension Calibration Insertion —
If Equipped
The telltale will illuminate when the
most comfortable suspension setting is
activated.
Speed Limiter System Failure
While driving, the telltale will illuminate
to signal a Speed Limiter system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the failure eliminated.
Temporary All Wheel Drive Failure —
If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate to indicate
that the AWD dynamic control system is
temporarily deactivated to prevent
damage. The traction system will work
in RWD mode in this instance.
In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce
the load to allow the system to cool down. The
AWD system will resume normal operation when
the symbol disappears from the display.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Overheating
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
transmission overheating, after a partic-
ularly demanding use. In this case an
engine performance limitation is carried
out.
Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off
or idling.
Wear On Brake Pads
This light will illuminate when the brake
pads have reached their wear limit.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
Always use genuine parts or similar because the
Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could
detect anomalies.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
79
(Continued)
WEAR ON Carbon Ceramic Material (CCM)
Brake Discs — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
carbon ceramic material brake discs
have reached their wear limit.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Windshield Wiper Failure
Signals a windshield wiper failure.
Contact an authorized dealer.
GREEN SYMBOLS
Adaptive Cruise Control System —
If Equipped
The symbol comes on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control system is
activated.
Automatic Headlights
The symbol lights up when the
automatic headlights are on.
Headlights
The telltale will illuminate when the
headlights are turned on.
Cruise Control Activated
The telltale will illuminate when the
Cruise Control system is activated.
Stop/Start Operation
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
Stop/Start system intervention
(stopping the engine).
When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut
off
Ú
page 95.
BLUE SYMBOLS
Automatic High Beam Headlights —
If Equipped
The telltale will illuminate when the
automatic high beam headlights are
activated.
High Beam Headlights
The telltale will illuminate when the high
beam headlights are activated.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM
Operation
The Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD) carries out
a continuous diagnosis of the components of the
vehicle related to emissions.
It also alerts the driver of when these
components are no longer in peak condition by
switching on the Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator warning light on the instrument panel.
The aim of the OBD system (Onboard Diagnostic)
is to:
Monitor the efficiency of the system
Indicate an increase in emissions
Indicate the need to replace damaged
components
The vehicle also has a connector, which can
interface with appropriate tools, that makes it
possible to read the error codes stored in the
electronic control units together with a series of
specific parameters for engine operation and
diagnosis. This check can be carried out by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
After eliminating a fault, to check the system
completely, an authorized dealer is obliged to run
tests and, if necessary certain road tests.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
WARNING!
It is recommended to use only OEM brake
pads to ensure the original performance of the
braking system.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
80
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ACC position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ACC position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or st
art the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should have
your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M
station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle sys
tems,
including personal information.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
81
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting the engine, be sure to adjust the
seat, the interior rearview mirror, door mirrors,
and fasten the seat belt correctly.
Never press the accelerator pedal before starting
the engine.
If necessary, messages indicating the starting
procedure will be shown in the display.
STARTING PROCEDURE
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and place
the gear selector in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
2. Fully press the brake pedal without touching
the accelerator.
3. Briefly push the ignition button.
4. If the engine doesn't start within a few
seconds, you need to repeat the procedure.
If the problem persists, contact an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
at least 300 feet (91 meters).
The remote starting system also activates the
climate control, the heated seats (if equipped),
and the heated steering wheel (if equipped),
depending on temperatures outside and inside of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK (P).
Doors closed.
Hood closed.
Liftgate closed.
Hazard switch off.
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed).
Battery at an acceptable charge level.
PANIC button not pushed.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
buildup may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú
page 184.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before
trying again.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82
System not disabled from previous remote
start event.
Vehicle Security System indicator flashing.
Ignition in the OFF position (if equipped with
keyless ignition system).
Fuel level meets minimum requirement.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 39°F (4°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.
Exiting remote start will resume previous
operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active.
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation will continue.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
To prevent possible engine damage while starting
at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit
engine cranking when the ambient temperature
is less than –22°F (–30°C) and the oil
temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
block heater has not been used. An
externally-powered electric engine block heater is
available as optional equipment or from an
authorized dealer.
The message “Plug In Engine Heater” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster when the
ambient temperature is below 5°F (–15°C) at
the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to
avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
If the vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days, it is advisable to follow the
instructions below.
To start the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push the ignition button
2. If the engine does not start, wait five seconds
and let the starter cool down and then repeat
the starting procedure
3. If the engine does not start after eight
attempts, let the starter cool down for at least
10 seconds, and then repeat the starting
procedure
If the problem persists, contact an authorized
dealer.
NOTE:
After prolonged vehicle inactivity, very difficult
starting, that can be noticed through rapid fatigue
of the starter, might also be due to a partially
drained battery
Ú
page 184.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
Starting the Engine with Key Fob Battery Run
Down or Drained
If the ignition does not respond when the button
is pushed, the key fob battery might be run down
or drained. Therefore, the system does not detect
the presence of the key fob in the vehicle, and will
display a dedicated message
Ú
page 22.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended oil and adhering to
the prescribed oil change intervals is
important to prevent engine damage and
ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú
page 184.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before
trying again.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING
83
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a
reduced RPM, without accelerating suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the digital
engine coolant temperature indicator starts to
rise for maximum performance.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
To stop the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Park the vehicle in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic.
2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.
3. With engine idling, push the ENGINE START/
STOP button on the steering wheel to STOP
the engine.
NOTE:
Do not leave the ignition in ACC position when the
engine is off.
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold
the ignition or push the ENGINE START/STOP
button three times consecutively within a few
seconds. The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the ACC position.
With the keyless ignition system, it is possible to
exit the vehicle taking the key fob with you,
without the engine switching off. The vehicle will
inform about the absence of the key on board,
when the doors are closed.
After the engine has stopped (cycling from the
ACC to the OFF position) the accessories are still
powered for about three minutes, or until a door
is opened.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
window switches remain active for three minutes.
Opening a front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
TURBOCHARGER COOL DOWN
It is recommended before switching the vehicle
off, to keep the engine idling for a few minutes so
that the turbocharger can be suitably lubricated.
This procedure is particularly recommended after
severe driving.
After a full load operation, keep the engine idling
for three to five minutes before switching it off.
This time allows the lubricating oil and the engine
coolant to eliminate the excessive heat from
combustion chamber, bearings, inner
components and turbocharger.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —
IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the
engine block heater is required.
Follow the steps below to properly use the engine
block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (access
door on the passenger side wiper cowl).
2. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
3. After the vehicle is running, properly stow the
cord away behind the access door on the
passenger side wiper cowl.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volt
AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have a warming effect on the
engine and at least four hours to have a
warming effect when ambient temperatures
are below -20°F (-29°C).
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
STARTING AND OPERATING
84
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
ENGINE BREAK-IN
For both engines, use the following engine
break-in recommendations:
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in period and not interpreted as an indi-
cation of a problem. Please monitor your oil level
during the break-in period and add oil as
required.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the
following driving behaviors during the new vehicle
break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):
Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for
an extended period of time.
Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than
3,500 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):
Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration
in lower gears (FIRST to THIRD gears).
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than
5,000 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting
manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher RPM
when possible.
Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):
Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first
1,500 miles (2,414 km).
NOTE:
Monitor engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher through the first oil change interval.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
(EPB)
The EPB features a switch located on the center
console, a caliper with motor for each rear wheel,
and an electronic control module.
Electric Park Brake Switch
The EPB can be engaged in two ways:
Manually, by pulling the switch on the center
console.
Automatically, in “Safe Hold” or “Auto Park
Brake” conditions.
NOTE:
Normally, the EPB is engaged automatically when
the engine is stopped. This function can be deac-
tivated/activated on the Information and Enter-
tainment system by selecting the following items
in sequence on the main menu: “Settings”,
“Driver Assistance” and “Automatic Parking
Brake”.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
85
In addition to engaging the EPB, along with
steering and positioning chocks in front of the
wheels (when on a steep slope), you must always
place the vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before
leaving.
Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery
must be replaced in order to unlock the EPB.
Engaging The EPB Manually
Briefly pull the switch located on the center
console to manually engage the EPB when the
vehicle is stationary.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle
when engaging the EPB.
A slight movement of the brake pedal may be
detected when engaging the EPB with the brake
pedal pressed.
With the EPB engaged, the Brake Warning Light
on the instrument cluster display and the switch
will illuminate.
If, under exceptional circumstances, the use of
the brake is required with the vehicle in motion,
keep the switch on the center console pulled as
long as the brake action is necessary.
The Brake Warning Light may turn on with the
hydraulic system temporarily unavailable; in this
case, braking is controlled by the motors.
The brake lights will also automatically turn on in
the same way as normal braking with the use of
the brake pedal.
Release the switch on the center console to stop
the braking action with the vehicle in motion.
If, through this procedure, the vehicle is braked
until a speed below 1.9 mph (2.0 km/h) is
reached and the switch is kept pulled, the parking
brake will definitively engage.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle with the EPB engaged, or using
it several times to slow down the vehicle, may
cause severe damage to the braking system.
Disengaging The EPB Manually
In order to manually release the parking brake,
the ignition should be in the ACC position. Press
the brake pedal, and then push the switch on the
center console briefly.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle,
and a slight movement of the brake pedal may be
detected during disengagement.
After disengaging the EPB, the Brake Warning
Light on the instrument cluster display and the
light on the switch will turn off.
If the Brake Warning Light on the instrument
cluster display remains on with the EPB
disengaged, this indicates a fault: in this case,
contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Always engage the EPB when parking the
vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused by
the unexpected movement of the vehicle.
Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of
the EPB.
CAUTION!
With the Electronic Parking Brake failure
warning light on, some functions of the EPB
are deactivated. In this case the driver is
responsible for brake activation and vehicle
parking in complete safety conditions.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
STARTING AND OPERATING
86
(Continued)
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
O
PERATING MODES
The EPB may operate as follows:
“Dynamic Operating Mode”: this mode is
activated by pulling the switch repeatedly
while driving.
“Static Engagement and Release Mode”: with
the vehicle stationary, the EPB can be
activated by pulling the switch on the center
console once. Push the switch and the brake
pedal at the same time to disengage the
brake.
“Drive Away Release” — if equipped: the EPB
will automatically disengage with the driver
side seat belt fastened and the detection of an
action performed by the driver to move the
vehicle (DRIVE [D] or REVERSE [R]). This
feature can be turned on or off in the
Information and Entertainment System.
NOTE:
If the car is equipped with carbon ceramic brake
discs, it is necessary to fasten the seat belts or
turn off the EPB before starting to avoid damages
to the ceramic brake discs.
“Safe Hold”: if the vehicle speed is lower than
1.9 mph (2.0 km/h), the gear selector is not in
PARK (P) position and the driver's intention of
leaving the vehicle is detected, the EPB will
automatically engage to hold the vehicle in
safety conditions.
“Auto Park Brake”: if the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (2.0 km/h), the EPB will
automatically engage when the gear selector
is in PARK (P) position. The light on the switch
located on the center console switches on
together with the Brake Warning Light on the
instrument cluster display when the parking
brake is engaged and applied to the wheels.
Each automatic parking brake engagement
can be canceled by pushing the switch on the
center console and at the same time moving
the gear selector for the transmission to
position PARK (P).
SAFE HOLD
Safe Hold is a safety function that automatically
engages the EPB in the event of a dangerous
condition for the vehicle.
The EPB engages automatically to prevent
vehicle movement if:
The vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph
(2.0 km/h).
A transmission operating mode different from
PARK (P) is activated.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The driver side door is open.
No attempts to apply pressure on the brake
pedal have been detected.
The vehicle is parked on roads with a slope of
more than 4%.
The “Safe Hold” function can be temporarily
disabled by pushing the EPB switch located on
the center console and the brake pedal at the
same time, with the vehicle stationary and the
driver side door open.
Once disabled, the function will activate again
when the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
or the ignition is cycled to OFF and then to ACC.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled 8-speed automatic transmission
where gear shifting automatically takes place,
depending on the vehicle usage instantaneous
parameters (vehicle speed, grade, and
accelerator pedal position).
Manual gear shifting can still occur thanks to the
“Sequential” mode position for the gear selector.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
position, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
87
DISPLAY
The following information is shown on the
dedicated area of the display:
In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P, R, N, D)
and with "D" the current gear number.
In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): the mode
(M), the current gear and the double or single
gear shift request, both up and down (single or
double arrow).
Gear Display
GEAR SELECTOR
The gear functioning is controlled by the gear
selector, which can assume the following
positions:
P = PARK
R = REVERSE
N = NEUTRAL
D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed)
AutoStick: + manually shift to higher gear; –
manually shift to lower gear
The positions diagram is illustrated on the top of
the gear selector.
Gear Selector Center Console
The letter corresponding to the mode selected on
the gear selector lights up and appears on the
instrument cluster display.
To select a mode, move the gear selector forward
or rearward while pressing the brake pedal. To
engage REVERSE (R), press the brake pedal
together with the gear selector button.
Gear Selector
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN or ACC position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
1 — Gear Selector
2 — PARK (P) Button
3 — Gear Selector Button
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
STARTING AND OPERATING
88
(Continued)
(Continued)
The gear selector is a joystick style shifting
mechanism which returns to the center position
automatically. It can be pushed forward twice and
rearward twice, based on the starting condition.
The PARK (P) mode can be enabled/disabled by
pushing the PARK (P) button. PARK (P) mode is
automatically activated if the following conditions
are met simultaneously:
DRIVE (D) mode or REVERSE (R) mode is active
The vehicle’s speed is close to 0 mph (0 km/h)
The brake pedal is released
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened
The driver’s door is open
To transition the vehicle into REVERSE (R) mode
from DRIVE (D) mode, or into DRIVE (D) mode
from REVERSE (R) mode, it is necessary to move
the gear selector by pushing the gear selector
button.
AutoStick can be activated by moving the gear
selector from DRIVE (D) to the left and then
forward toward the - symbol (or backward toward
the + symbol) changing the gear.
To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from position
NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R),
the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or
stopped, and the brake pedal must also be pressed.
NOTE:
DO NOT accelerate while shifting from position
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to another position.
After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds
before accelerating. This precaution is partic-
ularly important with the engine cold.
It is not possible to select NEUTRAL (N) mode
from PARK (P) mode.
TRANSMISSION OPERATING MODES
PARK (P)
The transmission is locked in this mode. The
engine can be started in this mode.
NOTE:
Never try to engage PARK (P) mode when the
vehicle is moving. Before leaving the vehicle,
make sure this mode is engaged (letter P shown
on the display and gear selector) and that the
parking brake is engaged.
When parking on a flat surface, first engage the
PARK (P) mode and then engage the EPB.
When parking uphill, before activating the PARK
(P) mode, engage the EPB. Otherwise, it could be
difficult to engage the PARK (P) mode.
To check that the PARK (P) mode is actually
engaged, make sure P is illuminated on the
display and on the gear selector.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the
transmission is in PARK before leaving the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
position, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
park brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
89
REVERSE (R)
Select this mode only with the vehicle at a
standstill.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
EPB and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if
you must leave the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
Use this mode in normal driving conditions.
Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or REVERSE
(R) modes must take place only after releasing
the accelerator pedal, with vehicle at a standstill
and brake pedal pressed.
This mode ensures automatic engagement of the
most suitable gears for driving needs and
maximum fuel economy in terms of consumption.
In this position, the transmission shifts the gears
automatically, selecting the most suitable for
forward driving among those available as you go.
In this way the vehicle's optimal driving character-
istics are provided for all conditions.
AutoStick
In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for sport
driving, when the vehicle is driven with a heavy
load, on slopes, when towing heavy trailers), it is
recommended to use the AutoStick (sequential
shifting) mode to select and keep a lower fixed
ratio.
In these conditions, the use of a lower gear
improves vehicle performance and prevents
overheating.
It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) mode to
AutoStick mode regardless of vehicle speed.
Activation
Starting from DRIVE (D) mode, to activate the
sequential drive mode, move the gear selector to
the left (– and + indication of the trim). The gear
engaged will be shown on the display.
Shifting is made by moving the gear selector
forward, toward symbol – or backward, toward
symbol +.
Steering Column Mounted Shift Paddles —
If Equipped
The gear can be manually shifted also by using
the paddles behind the steering wheel, pull the
right paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and
release it to engage a higher gear, perform the
same operation with the left paddle (-) to engage
a lower gear.
Steering Column Mounted Shift Paddles
NOTE:
If only one manual shift is necessary, the letter D
will remain on the display with the engaged gear
next to it.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must push the
ignition button to cycle from OFF position to
the ACC position, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
STARTING AND OPERATING
90
Deactivation
To deactivate the sequential driving mode, bring
the gear selector back in position DRIVE (D)
("automatic" driving mode).
NOTE:
To select the correct gear for maximum
deceleration (engine brake), keep the gear
paddle pulled (–): the transmission goes to an
operating mode in which the vehicle can slow
down easily.
The vehicle will keep the gear selected by the
driver until the safety conditions allow it.
This means, for example, that the system will
try to prevent the engine from switching off,
automatically downshifting if the engine speed
is too low.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME
M
ODE
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated.
In this condition, the transmission stays in
FOURTH gear, regardless of the selected gear.
Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL
(N) still work.
The symbol might light up in the instrument
cluster.
Temporary failure
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then restart the
engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmis-
sion will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if
the problem could reoccur. If the transmission
cannot be reset, service is required at an autho-
rized dealer.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) S
YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds
the gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes
are applied.
This system prevents you from moving the gear
selector from position PARK (P) unless the brakes
are applied.
To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the
ignition must be cycled to the ON/RUN position
(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must
be pressed.
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Disabling
Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the vehicle,
conveyor vehicle washing systems), inhibit the
automatic activation of PARK (P) mode when
stopping the engine. To do so, follow the
directions below:
1. Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
2. Place the transmission in the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
3. Push the ignition button for at least three
seconds.
The automatic activation of PARK (P) when the
engine is stopped can also be deactivated on the
Information and Entertainment system by
selecting the following functions on the main
menu: "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and
"Automatic Parking Brake".
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
91
(Continued)
IMPORTANT NOTES
Failure to comply with what is reported below may
damage the transmission:
Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the vehicle
at a standstill.
Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass from
REVERSE to another mode only with the
vehicle at a standstill and engine idling.
Do not change between PARK (P), REVERSE
(R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) modes with
engine running at a speed above idling.
Before activating any transmission operating
mode, fully press the brake pedal.
NOTE:
The unexpected movement of the vehicle can
injure the occupants or people nearby. Do not
leave the vehicle with engine running: before
getting out of the passenger compartment always
engage the EPB, select the PARK (P) mode, and
stop the engine.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
position, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN or ACC position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Only engage the gear with engine at idling
while fully pressing the brake pedal. If the
transmission temperature exceeds the
normal operating limits, the transmission
control unit may change the gear
engagement order and reduce the drive
torque. If the transmission overheats, it
could operate incorrectly until it cools down.
When using the vehicle with extremely low
external temperatures, the transmission
operation may change depending on the
engine and transmission temperature, as
well as vehicle speed. Activation of the
torque converter clutch and of the EIGHTH
gear is inhibited until the transmission oil is
correctly warmed up. Complete operation of
the transmission will be enabled as soon as
the fluid temperature reaches the
predefined value.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
STARTING AND OPERATING
92
ALFA DNA SELECTOR
ALFA DNA SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA system
selector (located on the center console). There
are up to four modes of operation to be selected
according to driving style and road conditions:
Alfa DNA Pro System Selector
d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).
n = Natural (mode for driving in normal
conditions).
a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving mode for
maximum fuel savings).
RACE = track race driving mode (if equipped).
= Adjusts the calibration of the active
suspension (if equipped).
Unlike the other modes, the RACE position does
not latch; therefore, by rotating the selector to
RACE, it will return to its initial position "d".
On the instrument cluster display, the different
modes are characterized by different colors:
Natural - Blue
Dynamic - Red
Advanced Efficiency - Green
RACE - Yellow
Mode Display
Each driving mode is graphically different in
frame color and contents of each individual
"performance" screen.
DRIVING MODES
“Natural” Mode
“Natural” Mode is characterized by reduced
engine performance and ECO shifting strategy for
the automatic transmission.
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter
“n”; the display will light up in blue.
Natural Mode
The “Performance” screen graphically
reproduces some parameters closely linked to
the efficiency of the driving style, with a view to
limiting consumption.
Natural Mode Performance Display
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
93
“Dynamic” Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter
“d”; the display will light up in red.
Dynamic Mode
ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds
that ensure more enjoyable, sportier driving while
guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle.
Engine and transmission: adoption of sports
mapping.
Dynamic Mode Performance Display
The “Performance” screen displays parameters
related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate
the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering gravity
acceleration as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed on the
right.
“Advanced Efficiency” Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter
“a”; the display will light up in green.
Advanced Efficiency Mode
ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds
aimed at ensuring maximum safety in low-grip
driving conditions. It is advisable to select
“Advanced Efficiency” mode in the presence of
low-grip road surfaces.
Engine and transmission: standard response.
The “Performance” screen graphically displays
some parameters closely related to the vehicle
acceleration, deceleration and gear selector.
Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display
WARNING!
In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator
pedal increases considerably. Consequently,
driving is less fluid and comfortable. The driver
must ensure full control of the vehicle at all
times to avoid a collision.
1 — Acceleration
2 — Deceleration
3 — Gear Selector
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
STARTING AND OPERATING
94
“RACE” Mode
Activation
“RACE” Mode is activated by rotating the selector
to the “RACE” position. The instrument cluster
display will light up in yellow.
RACE Mode
Engine and transmission: adoption of sports
mapping.
The “Performance” screen displays parameters
related to vehicle stability. The graphs illustrate
the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering gravity
acceleration as a reference unit.
The screen displays the lateral and longitudinal
acceleration peaks.
RACE Mode Performance Display
NOTE:
If the brake system overheats, this is communi-
cated by the Information and Entertainment
system. In this case, allow the system to cool for
a few minutes by driving the vehicle normally
without operating the brakes.
Driving Mode Deactivation
To deactivate any driving mode, simply move the
selector to any other mode.
NOTE:
The next time that the engine is started the
vehicle will be in “Natural” mode regardless of
which mode was selected before the engine
was stopped.
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION
(AAS) — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle's electronic suspension management
system is aimed at optimizing the vehicle's
performance.
The system continuously monitors the damping
of the suspensions through the actuator installed
on each shock absorber. This way, the calibration
of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the
conditions of the road surface and to the dynamic
conditions of the vehicle, improving its comfort
and road holding.
The driver can choose, even while driving (only in
“Dynamic” mode), between two types of
suspension calibration: a sportier or a more
comfortable one.
By pushing the button, the system changes the
shock absorber calibration.
Alfa Active Suspension Button
In case of a system failure, the symbol and a
dedicated message will be shown on the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Only activate this mode at the track.
In “RACE”, the sensitivity of the accelerator
pedal increases considerably. Consequently,
driving is less fluid and comfortable. The
driver must ensure full control of the vehicle
at all times to avoid a collision.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
95
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start system automatically shuts off the
engine during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal will automatically restart the
engine.
The function was developed to increase vehicle
efficiency by reducing fuel consumption, gas
emissions, and sound pollution.
NOTE:
When the Stop/Start system stops the engine,
the power steering is also disabled.
OPERATING MODE
Stopping The Engine
With the vehicle at a standstill and brake pedal
pressed, the engine switches off if the gear
selector is in a position other than REVERSE (R).
The system does not operate when the gear
selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to make
parking maneuvers easier.
In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is
disabled to make the “Hill Start Assist” function
available (works only with running engine).
NOTE:
The engine can only be automatically stopped
after having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After
an automatic restart, the vehicle only needs to
exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stop the
engine.
Engine stopping is signaled by the symbol
lighting up on the instrument cluster display.
Restarting The Engine
To restart the engine, release the brake pedal or,
turn the steering wheel slightly (if equipped).
With the brake pressed and the transmission in
automatic mode DRIVE (D), the engine will restart
by shifting to REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to
“AutoStick”
Ú
page 88.
With brake pressed if the gear selector is in
“AutoStick” mode, the engine will restart by
shifting to PARK (P) or by moving the selector
to + or -
Ú
page 88.
SYSTEM MANUAL ACTIVATION/
D
EACTIVATION
To manually activate/deactivate the system,
push the button located on the control panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
Stop/Start Button
System Activation
The activation of the system is indicated by the
symbol lighting up on the display. In this
condition, the light on the button is off.
System Deactivation
A message will appear on the display when the
system is deactivated. In this condition, the light
on the button is on.
NOTE:
Each time the engine is started, the system is
activated regardless of where it was when it was
previously switched off.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
For higher comfort and increased safety, and to
reduce emissions, there are certain conditions
where the engine will not autostop despite the
system being active, such as:
Engine still cold.
Extreme cold outside temperature.
Battery not sufficiently charged.
Driver's door not shut.
Driver's seat belt not fastened.
REVERSE (R) gear engaged (e.g. for parking
maneuvers).
With the automatic climate control active, an
adequate cabin heating or cooling comfort has
not been reached or with MAX-DEF function
active.
During the first period of use, to initialize the
system.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
STARTING AND OPERATING
96
ENGINE RESTARTING CONDITIONS
Due to comfort, emission control, and safety
reasons, the engine can restart automatically
without any action by the driver, under special
conditions, such as:
Battery not sufficiently charged.
Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if the
brake pedal is pressed repeatedly).
Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on roads
with a grade).
Engine stopping by the Stop/Start system for
more than approximately three minutes.
With the automatic climate control active, an
adjustment in cabin heating or cooling is made
or with MAX-DEF function active.
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
When the engine is stopped through the Stop/
Start system, if the driver releases their seat belt,
opens the driver's or passenger's door, or opens
the hood from inside the vehicle, the engine can
be restarted only by using the ignition.
This condition is indicated to the driver both
through a buzzer and a message on the
instrument cluster display.
ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION
If the driver does not carry out any action for more
than three minutes after the automatic engine
restart, the Stop/Start system will switch off the
engine in order to prevent fuel consumption.
In this situation, the engine can only be restarted
using the ignition device.
NOTE:
It is possible to keep the engine running by deac-
tivating the system.
IRREGULAR OPERATION
In the event of malfunction, the Stop/Start
system is deactivated.
For failure indications
Ú
page 70.
VEHICLE INACTIVITY
In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the battery
is replaced), special attention must be paid to the
disconnection of the battery power supply.
Proceed as follows:
Remove connector from socket to disconnect
sensor (battery status monitoring) installed on
the negative pole of the battery. This sensor
should never be disconnected from the pole
except if the battery is replaced.
Battery Power Supply
NOTE:
After setting the ignition to OFF and having closed
the driver side door, wait at least one minute
before disconnecting the electrical supply from
the battery. When reconnecting the electrical
supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition
is in the OFF position and the driver side door is
closed.
1 — Socket
2 — Sensor
3 — Connector
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
97
SPEED LIMITER
DESCRIPTION
This feature allows the driver to program the
maximum speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The maximum set speed can be exceeded by
continuing to press the accelerator pedal.
The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle
stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that
can be set is 18 mph (30 km/h).
When this feature is active, the vehicle speed
depends on the pressing of the accelerator pedal
until the programmed speed limit is reached
Ú
page 97.
ACTIVATION
The feature can be activated/deactivated
through the radio system.
Activating The Device
To access this feature, select the “Driver
Assistance” widget in the radio system, then
select the following items in sequence:
1. Speed Limiter
2. ON
The activation of this feature is signaled by the
illumination of the green Speed Limiter icon,
along with the last speed set, in the instrument
cluster display. The Speed Limiter feature can
remain active concurrently with the Cruise
Control system. If a speed limit below the one
indicated in the Cruise Control is selected, the
Cruise Control speed will be lowered to that of the
Speed Limiter. This function remains available in
RACE mode.
Speed Limiter Display
SPEED LIMIT PROGRAMMING
The speed limit can be programmed through the
radio system.
To access the function on the main menu, select
the following items in order:
1. Driver Assistance
2. Speed Limiter - Set Speed
By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed increases by
5 mph (5 km/h), from a minimum of 18 mph
(30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).
EXCEEDING THE PROGRAMMED SPEED
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the
programmed speed can be exceeded even with
the device active (e.g. in the event of overtaking).
The device is disabled until the speed drops
below the set limit, after which it reactivates
automatically.
PROGRAMMED SPEED ICON FLASHING
The programmed speed will flash in the following
scenarios:
When the accelerator pedal has been fully
pressed and the vehicle has exceeded the
programmed speed.
Activating the system after setting a limit below
the effective speed of the vehicle.
In the event of overtake acceleration.
DEACTIVATION
The feature can be activated/deactivated
through the radio system.
Deactivating The Device
To access this feature, select the “Driver
Assistance” widget in the radio system, then
select the following items in sequence:
1. Speed Limiter
2. OFF
Automatic Deactivation Of The Device
The device deactivates automatically in the event
of fault in the system. In this case, contact an
authorized dealer.
Temporary Signal Loss
When the devices loses the signal, the white
symbol without the speed indication illuminates
on the display.
System Failure
If there is a system failure, the amber symbol
illuminates on the display.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
STARTING AND OPERATING
98
CRUISE CONTROL
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to
maintain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always
be aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at
a time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will
be unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
Cruise Control On/Off Switch
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
While driving downhill, the system could brake
the vehicle to keep the set speed the same.
To Activate
To activate the Cruise Control system, push the
on/off button located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
The activation of the system is signaled by the
white warning light illuminating in the instrument
cluster display.
Cruise Control Indicator Light
The Cruise Control function can remain active at
the same time as the Speed Limiter system. If the
set speed is higher than the speed set with the
Speed Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to
that of the Speed Limiter.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an acci-
dent. Always ensure the system is OFF when
you are not using it.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
99
To Set A Desired Speed
To set a desired speed, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the Cruise Control on.
2. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET switch up or down and
release to activate. When the accelerator is
released, the vehicle will maintain the
selected speed automatically.
SET Switch Location
If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can
accelerate beyond the set speed by pressing the
accelerator. When you release the pedal, the
vehicle goes back to the previously set speed.
When traveling downhill with the system active,
the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the set one.
NOTE:
Before pushing the SET switch, the vehicle must
be traveling at a constant speed on a flat surface.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
the speed by pushing the SET switch upward or
decrease the speed by pushing the SET switch
downward.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET switch once will result in a
1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent
movement of the switch results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the switch is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the switch is
released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET switch once will result in a
1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent
movement of the switch results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the switch is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the switch is
released, then the new set speed will be
established.
NOTE:
Moving the SET switch allows for adjusting of the
speed according to the selected unit of measure-
ment set on the radio system. Refer to the Infor-
mation and Entertainment System Owner’s
Manual for more information.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater
speed loss or gain may occur so it may be
preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Before returning to the previously set speed, you
must accelerate to a speed close to the set
speed, then push and release the RES button.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
STARTING AND OPERATING
100
Resume Button Location
In AutoStick (sequential) mode, before resuming
the previously set speed, you should accelerate
until you are close to that speed. Then, push and
release the RES button.
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal deactivates the Cruise
Control without deleting the set speed.
The Cruise Control may also be deactivated by
applying the Electric Park Brake or when the
braking system is operated (e.g. operation of the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system).
The set speed is deleted in the following cases:
Pushing the on/off button a second time
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
If there is a malfunction with the Cruise Control
system
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver
assist system that combines the Cruise Control
functions with controlling the distance from the
vehicle ahead. ACC increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control
function performs differently
Ú
page 98.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC
uses a radar sensor located behind the front
bumper and a camera located in the center/
upper part of the windshield, to detect the
presence of a vehicle close ahead.
The system sets and holds the vehicle at the
desired speed without needing to press the
accelerator. It also sets and holds a distance
from the vehicle ahead (these settings are set by
the driver).
Front Bumper Radar Location
Windshield Camera Location
If the system detects a vehicle ahead, it will
automatically intervene by slightly braking or
accelerating in order to maintain the preset
distance. It will not exceed the original set speed
when adapting to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control performance is not guar-
anteed under the following circumstances, and it
is recommended to turn the system off when:
Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.
Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones.
Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, roads
with steep inclines, or roads with numerous
turns and bends.
Entering a turn lane.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed
Ú
page 247.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
101
(Continued)
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
19 mph (30 km/h) and the maximum is 110 mph
(180 km/h).
The system cannot be activated:
When pressing the brake pedal.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the Electric Park Brake has been
operated.
When either PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL is
engaged.
When the engine RPM is above a maximum
threshold.
When the vehicle speed is not within the
operational speed range.
When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (or
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) or other stability
control systems) are operating or have just
operated.
When the ESC system is off.
When the Forward Collision Warning system (if
equipped) is braking automatically.
In the event of a system failure.
When the engine is off.
In case of obstruction of the radar sensor (in
this case the bumper area where it is located
must be cleaned).
If the system is set, the conditions described
above also cause a cancellation or deactivation
of the system. These situations may vary
according to the conditions.
NOTE:
The system will not be deactivated when speeds
higher than those set are reached by pressing the
accelerator pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In
these situations, the system may not work
correctly and it is recommended to deactivate it.
To Activate/Deactivate
The system has four operating states:
Enabled (speed not set)
Activated (speed set)
Paused
Deactivated
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
• May react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle) at speeds between
2 mph and 35 mph (4 km/h and
60 km/h).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can res
ult in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a vehicle ahead and hold
the vehicle for approximately two
minutes in the stop position. If the
vehicle ahead does not start moving
within two minutes, the parking brake
will be activated and the ACC system will
be canceled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving
situations (i.e., in highway construction
zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
STARTING AND OPERATING
102
To Activate
To enable the system, push and release the on/
off button located on the left side on the steering
wheel.
On/Off Button
When the system is enabled and ready to
operate, the display shows the white ACC icon
above dashes in place of the speed.
Enabled Icons
Setting a speed activates the system. The display
shows the icon in green with the set speed.
To Pause/Deactivate
With the feature enabled (speed not set), push
the on/off button to disable.
With the feature active (speed set), push the on/
off button to pause. The display will show the icon
in white with the speed in brackets. To deactivate
the feature, push the on/off button a second
time.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the desired speed,
push the RES/SET switch downward and release
it to activate the system. When the accelerator is
released, the vehicle will maintain the set speed
automatically.
SET Switch
While the accelerator pedal is pressed, the
system will not be able to control the distance
between the vehicle and the one ahead. In this
case, the speed will be determined only by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
The system will return to normal operation as
soon as the accelerator pedal is released.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
Once the system has been activated, you can
increase the speed by pushing the RES/SET
switch upward or decrease the speed by pushing
the RES/SET switch downward. Each time the
switch is pushed, the speed is adjusted by 1 mph.
Pushing and holding the switch upward or
downward will cause the set speed to adjust in
5 mph increments until the button is released.
The new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
Moving the RES/SET switch downward allows
you to adjust the speed according to the
selected unit of measurement (U.S. or Metric)
set on the radio system. Refer to the
Information and Entertainment System
Owner’s Manual for more information.
When the unit of measurement is set to Metric,
pushing and holding the RES/SET switch will
adjust the speed in 10 km/h increments.
By keeping the accelerator pedal pressed, the
vehicle can continue to accelerate beyond the
set speed. In this case, use the RES/SET
switch to set the speed to the vehicle’s current
speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
103
(Continued)
When you push the RES/SET button to reduce
the speed, the braking system intervenes
automatically if the engine brake does not slow
the vehicle down sufficiently to reach the set
speed. The device holds the set speed uphill
and downhill; however a slight variation is
entirely normal, particularly on slight inclines.
The transmission could shift to a lower gear
when driving downhill, or when accelerating.
This is normal and necessary to maintain the
set speed.
The system will disable while driving if the
brakes overheat.
To Resume
Once the system has been canceled but not
deactivated, to resume a previously set speed,
simply push the RES/SET switch upward and
remove your foot from the accelerator to recall it.
The system will be set to the last stored speed.
Setting The Distance Between Vehicles
The distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead may be set to one bar (short), two
bars (medium), three bars (long), or four bars
(maximum).
Distance Icons
The distances from the vehicle ahead are propor-
tional to speed.
The interval of time with relation to the vehicle
ahead remains constant and varies from one
second (for the short distance one-bar setting) to
two seconds (for the maximum distance four-bar
setting).
The set distance is shown on the display by a
dedicated icon.
The setting is four bars (maximum) the first time
the system is used. After the distance has been
modified by the driver, the new distance will be
stored even if the system is deactivated and
reactivated.
To Decrease The Distance
Push and release the distance button to decrease
the distance setting. The distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter) every time the
button is pushed.
Distance Button
The set speed is held if there are no vehicles
ahead. Once the shortest distance has been
selected, the next push of the button will set the
maximum distance.
If a slower vehicle is detected in the same lane,
the vehicle icon on the display illuminates from
grey to white. The system automatically adjusts
the vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance,
independently of the set speed.
The vehicle holds the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
higher than the set speed.
The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or the
detection field of the Adaptive Cruise Control
system sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The Adaptive Cruise Control system is
deactivated/paused.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
The maximum braking applied by the system
is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in
all cases if needed.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
STARTING AND OPERATING
104
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle at a speed greater than 45 mph (70 km/h),
the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the
vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered
when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will
only be active when passing on the left hand side.
The system detects the direction of traffic
automatically when the vehicle passes from left
hand traffic to right hand traffic. In this case, the
overtaking assist function is only active when the
reference vehicle is overtaken on the right. The
additional acceleration is deactivated when the
driver uses the right direction indicator and
returns to the original lane.
Stop And Go Function
The Stop and Go operating strategy allows you to
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
until the vehicle has completely stopped.
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle
in front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will have to push the RES/
SET switch upward to restart.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated and the set speed is
canceled if:
The on/off button is pushed (when the system
is on or paused)
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
RACE mode is activated (Quadrifoglio models)
The system is canceled (the set speed and
distance are stored):
When the system is paused
Ú
page 101
When the conditions shown in the “Activating
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” section occur
Ú
page 101
Limited Operation Warning
If the dedicated message is shown on the display,
a condition limiting the Adaptive Cruise Control
operation may have occurred.
This could be due to an obstruction of the
vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also be due
to a fault in the system. If an obstruction is
detected, clean the area of the windshield
opposite the interior rearview mirror, where the
camera is located, as well as the area of the front
fascia/bumper where the sensor is located. Then
check that the message has disappeared.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, normal operation will resume.
Should the fault persist, contact an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay
alert and may need to intervene. The following
are examples of these types of situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
If the system predicts that the braking level is
insufficient to hold the set distance, either
“BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is
displayed to warn the driver of approaching
the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also
emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake
immediately as necessary to hold a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead.
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or
objects along the direction of the vehicle.
Failure to comply with these precautions may
cause serious accidents and injuries.
The driver is fully responsible for holding a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead
respecting the highway code in force in the
respective country.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
105
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line
of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead
detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the
system will resume your original set speed. This is
a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may
not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Change
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
The ACC system can detect stationary vehicles
when the vehicle is traveling at speeds between
2 mph and 35 mph (4 km/h and 60 km/h). The
driver should always be attentive and be ready to
press the brakes if necessary.
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped
in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or
Crosswise Direction
The system cannot detect the presence of objects
or vehicles traveling in opposite or crosswise
directions and consequently will not activate.
Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or
Crosswise Direction
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
STARTING AND OPERATING
106
IFETEL: RCPBOMR 14-0766
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Changes or modifications made to this
equipment not expressly approved by Robert
BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorization to
operate this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
Toutes modifications apportées à cet
équipement qui ne sont pas expressément
homologuées par Robert BOSCH GmbH peuvent
annuler l'autorisation de la FCC de faire
fonctionner cet équipement.
Cet appareil a été vérifié et s'est révélé conforme
aux normes applicables aux appareils
numériques de catégorie A, en vertu de la section
15 des règlements de la FCC. Ces normes sont
définies pour fournir une protection raisonnable
contre les interférences nuisibles lorsque
l'équipement est utilisé dans les installations
résidentielles. Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut
émettre des ondes radioélectriques et, s'il n'est
pas installé et utilisé conformément au manuel
d’instruction, peut causer un brouillage
radioélectrique nuisible aux communications
radio. Le fonctionnement de cet équipement
dans une zone résidentielle est susceptible de
causer des interférences nuisibles; dans ce cas,
l'usager doit corriger les interférences à ses
propres frais.
Radio Frequency Exposure Information
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour
un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement
doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de
20 cm de distance entre la source de
rayonnement et votre corps.
Ce transmetteur ne doit pas etre place au meme
endroit ou utilise simultanement avec un autre
transmetteur ou antenne.
HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM
(HAS) — IF EQUIPPED
The Highway Assist System (HAS) is a driving
assistance system that is only available when
driving on highways. The system operates up to
speeds of 90 mph (145 km/h) when horizontal
signs are detected.
The system uses information from the front
camera and radar to help keep the vehicle in the
center of the lane and at a constant speed.
HAS combines Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
functions with lane centering logic to control the
trajectory of the vehicle. HAS requires the driver’s
hands to remain on the steering wheel.
Once HAS is activated, a dedicated screen will
appear on the instrument cluster display.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
To Activate
To activate the HAS system, push the button
located on the left side of the steering wheel.
Highway Assist Button
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
107
Suspension Conditions
The following operations will suspend the HAS
system:
Steer manually
Press the brake pedal
Disable the ACC device
Activate the turn signals
Push the ACC activation setting button for two
seconds to activate Cruise Control
Place the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE, or
NEUTRAL
Reactivating the ACC system will reactivate HAS
Ú
page 100.
Automatic Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following
situations:
If there are narrow bends
When hands are removed from the steering
wheel
If the left or right turn signal is activated
If the driver intentionally changes lanes
without using the turn signal
If the driver’s seat belt is released
If the gear selector is placed in DRIVE
If the “Active Braking” function is activated
Ú
page 145
If the vehicle exits the highway
If the lane markings are not detected by the
camera
If the ACC device is deactivated
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph
(145 km/h)
NOTE:
When the HAS system is turned off, the symbol
on the display turns red and then grey.
Hands on the steering wheel are detected by a
capacitive sensor installed in it.
When the automatic suspension conditions are
over, HAS will be automatically reactivated.
OPERATION
HAS only operates when the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel.
If the system detects that the driver’s hands have
been removed from the steering wheel, the
system will alert the driver to place their hands
back on the steering wheel
Ú
page 108.
If the vehicle crosses the lane boundary, the
steering wheel will vibrate and the dedicated
screen will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
HAS may take up to five seconds to turn on once
all conditions are met. During this time, a grey
indicator light will appear on the instrument
cluster display and the system will automatically
activate as soon as all of the conditions are met
with no intervention from the driver.
The following conditions must be met before HAS
turns on:
HAS must be enabled by pushing the button on
the steering wheel
The vehicle must be on a highway
ACC must be activated
The right and left lane boundaries must be
visible
The vehicle speed must be between 0 and
90 mph (0 and 145 km/h)
The camera, radar, and radio system must be
functioning properly
The road lane width must be between 8.5 ft
and 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)
The turn signals must not be activated
HAS must be functioning properly
Other operating limits:
If the speed of ACC can be set to a higher value
(top speed 110 mph (180 km/h), HAS is only
available as long as the vehicle speed is equal
to or less than 90 mph (145 km/h).
When the ACC speed is reduced and the
vehicle speed is less than 90 mph (145 km/h),
the system will automatically reactivate.
If the ACC speed is set to 90 mph (145 km/h),
traveling downhill may increase the vehicle
speed. HAS will deactivate until the speed
returns to 90 mph (145 km/h).
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The HAS status can always be viewed in the
instrument cluster display.
The system status is indicated by the color of the
symbol on the display.
HAS uses sensors in the steering wheel to detect
if the driver’s hands are on it.
If the driver’s hands are not on the steering
wheel, a series of warnings will appear in the
instrument cluster display to alert the driver to
reposition their hands on the steering wheel. An
acoustic signal will also sound. After a period of
time, HAS will disable if the driver’s hands do not
return to the steering wheel.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
STARTING AND OPERATING
108
After a period of time, HAS will disable if the driver
has not repositioned their hands on the steering
wheel.
When the system does not detect hands on the
steering wheel, it will warn the driver by displaying
a dedicated screen on the instrument cluster
display.
SYSTEM STATUS
Active System
When the system is active, the following screen
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Highway Assist System Active
If on a different menu screen, a symbol will
appear on the instrument cluster display
indicating that the system is active.
When the driver’s hands are removed from the
steering wheel, the system disables after a few
seconds. A screen will appear in the instrument
cluster display warning the driver to return their
hands to the steering wheel.
Active System (Hands Removed From The
Steering Wheel For A Short Time)
As soon as the driver removes their hands from
the steering wheel, the following screen will
appear in the instrument cluster display. The
system will remain active at this time.
Hands Removed Initial Warning
If the driver does not return their hands to the
steering wheel within a few seconds, the
following screen will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
Hands Secondary Warning
Active System (Hands Removed From The
Steering Wheel For A Long Time)
If the driver still has not returned their hands to
the steering wheel after the screen above is
displayed, the following screen will now appear in
the instrument cluster display, and an acoustic
signal will sound until the driver regains control of
the vehicle.
Hands Removed Final Warning
If the driver’s hands are not returned to the
steering wheel after an extended period of time,
a deactivation message will appear on the
instrument cluster display. The steering wheel
control will be deactivated.
This display will remain active even when the
driver’s hands are removed from the steering
wheel. The symbol on the display will turn grey.
When HAS is active, the Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systems (if
equipped), if previously activated, will remain
activated.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
109
LIMITED SYSTEM AVAILABILITY/
O
PERATION
System Availability
External factors and conditions may affect the
proper operation of HAS, such as:
Narrow, winding, curvy streets
Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog,
etc.)
Front lights of oncoming vehicles or direct
sunlight or shade
Damage or obstructions caused by mud, ice,
snow, etc.
Bumper damaged or not aligned
Interference with other equipment that causes
electromagnetic waves
Presence of roadwork/road construction sites
If the indications given by the navigation
system (if any) of the radio system are not yet
ready and/or if the navigation system is
recalculating the route
System Limited Operation
HAS may have limited or reduced functionality
when one of the following conditions occur:
Lane markings are not clear or in conditions of
poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog,
etc.)
Either the camera or radar are damaged,
covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow,
etc.)
When driving on hills or roads with narrow
bends
Near highway toll booths
When the highway entrance or exit is wider
than 20 ft (6 m)
If the camera is exposed to glare caused by
reflections or direct sunlight
If the navigation system information is
unavailable or being recalculated
NOTE:
If the vehicle approaches a bend that is too
narrow with respect to the current speed, HAS
will disable.
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the
windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) system can be
activated on all road types. The system uses a
camera to detect lane markings and keep the
vehicle in the center of the lane.
When the system is unable to detect lane
markings, it will still operate using surrounding
traffic. This can occur in congested traffic
scenarios, when the vehicles ahead or
surroundings obstruct the visibility of the lane
markings. When the speed is below 12 mph
(20 km/h), the system can use a lock-on strategy
that allows the vehicle to automatically follow the
vehicle ahead.
The TJA system combines Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) functions with Lane Departure Warning
functions to maintain vehicle speed and steering
wheel behavior.
NOTE:
Do not use the TJA system while driving in urban
areas.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
To activate the system, push the button on the
left side of the steering wheel.
To deactivate the system, push the button again.
Traffic Jam Assist Button
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the vehicle in the event that HAS
disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel when HAS is activated.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
STARTING AND OPERATING
110
Suspension Conditions
The following operations will suspend the TJA
system:
Pressing the brake pedal
Opening the driver’s door
Disabling ACC
If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph
(60 km/h)
Releasing the driver’s seat belt
Placing the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE, or
NEUTRAL
If the Forward Collision Warning system or
Active Braking intervenes
Automatic Deactivation
System operation will be temporarily disabled
under the following conditions:
When traveling around narrow bends
If the lane boundaries are not detected
One of the two lines is interrupted
The sun is low and reflects on the radar
camera
If the turn signals are activated
If the driver intentionally changes lanes
without using the turn signal
If manual steering begins
If the driver’s hands are removed from the
steering wheel
When there is no surrounding traffic and there
are no horizontal lane boundaries
If the system is not functioning properly
If lateral acceleration is high
NOTE:
When TJA is turned off, the symbol in the
instrument cluster display will turn red, and
then grey.
A sensor in the steering wheel detects whether
the driver’s hands are placed on the steering
wheel.
When the automatic suspension conditions are
over, the TJA system will be automatically
reactivated.
OPERATION
The TJA system can only operate when the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel.
If the system detects that the driver’s hands have
been removed from the steering wheel, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display to alert the driver to place their hands
back on the wheel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle begins to cross the lane
boundary, the steering wheel will vibrate and a
dedicated screen will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
The TJA system may take up to five seconds to
become active once all conditions are met.
The following conditions must be met in order to
activate the system:
The TJA system must be enabled
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system must
be turned on
The right and left lane boundaries must be
recognized by the system
The vehicle must be traveling at a speed
between 0 and 37 mph (0 and 60 km/h)
The camera, radar, and radio system must be
functioning properly
The road lane width must be between 8.5 ft
and 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)
The turn signals must be turned off
The TJA system must be functioning properly
If the ACC speed is set to 37 mph (60 km/h) or
less, traveling downhill may increase the
vehicle speed. The system will remain inactive
until the speed returns to 37 mph (60 km/h)
or less.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The TJA system status is indicated by the color of
the symbol in the instrument cluster display.
The system uses sensors in the steering wheel to
detect if the driver’s hands are present. If the
driver’s hands are removed, a series of warnings
will appear in the instrument cluster display to
alert the driver to reposition their hands on the
steering wheel. Acoustic signals will also be
emitted.
If the driver’s hands are not returned to the
steering wheel after a period of time, the system
will be disabled.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
111
SYSTEM STATUS
Active System
An active system is indicated by the following
screen in the “Driver Assistance” menu on the
instrument cluster display.
TJA System Active
Active System (Hands Removed From The
Steering Wheel For A Short Time)
The following screen will appear in the instrument
cluster display immediately after the driver’s
hands are removed from the steering wheel. The
system still remains active at this time.
Hands Removed Initial Warning
If the driver does not return their hands to the
steering wheel within a few seconds, the following
screen will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Hands Removed Secondary Warning
Active System (Hands Removed From The
Steering Wheel For A Long Time)
If the driver’s hands have still not been returned
to the steering wheel, the following screen will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
Hands Removed Final Warning
An acoustic signal will sound until the driver
regains control of the vehicle (hands on steering
wheel). The system is still active at this time.
If the driver’s hands are not returned to the
steering wheel after a period of time, a deacti-
vation message will appear on the instrument
cluster display and the steering wheel control will
be deactivated.
Once the symbol on the display turns grey, the
system is no longer active and the driver must
take control of the vehicle. At this time, the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system and Lane
Departure Warning system will also be disabled.
When the TJA system is active, the Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
systems (if equipped) will be temporarily
disabled. When TJA is not active, the LKA system
(
Ú
page 119) and LDW system (
Ú
page 117) will
remain active.
LIMITED SYSTEM AVAILABILITY/
O
PERATION
System Availability
Performance of the TJA system may be affected
by the following factors:
Narrow, winding, curvy streets
Lane boundaries that are not clear or in
conditions of poor visibility (e.g. heavy rain,
snow, fog, etc.)
If the camera is exposed to glare from direct
sunlight or headlights of an oncoming vehicle
If the camera or sensor is damaged, covered,
or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
STARTING AND OPERATING
112
The bumper is damaged or misaligned
Interference with other equipment causes
electromagnetic waves
Construction sites
If the indications given by the navigation
system of the radio system are not yet ready or
if the system is recalculating
System Limited Operation
The TJA system may have limited or reduced
functionality when one of the following conditions
occurs:
Lane boundaries are not clear or in conditions
of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog,
etc.)
Either the camera or radar are damaged,
covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow,
etc.)
When driving on hills or narrow bends
Near highway toll booths
When the highway entrance or exit is more
than 20 ft (6 m) wide
If the camera is exposed to glare from
reflections or direct sunlight
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the
windshield replaced by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the vehicle approaches a bend that is too
narrow with respect to the current speed, the
TJA system will deactivate.
TRAFFIC SIGN
RECOGNITION (TSR)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system uses a
camera mounted on the windshield to detect
recognizable road signs such as:
Speed limits
Signs indicating the end of the situations
indicated above
If the camera does not detect valid speed limits,
the radio system navigation system may suggest
unregulated speed limits.
The system always checks the traffic signs
indicating the current speed limit signs. The
system is able to recognize and display up to two
different road signs in the instrument cluster
display.
Depending on the unit of measurement (km or
mph) set through the Unit of Measurement menu
in the radio system, the TSR system will automat-
ically show the indication of the road sign in the
unit of measurements selected in the instrument
cluster display.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
The TSR system can be activated/deactivated in
the radio system in the Driver Assistance menu.
The system activation is signaled by road signs
shown on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
By selecting “Blinking”, the driver can activate
a warning to display when the speed exceeds
the limit indicated by the TSR system. The
speed road sign on the instrument cluster
display will blink until the vehicle speed drops
below the displayed limit.
Selecting “Offset” will set the speed at which
“Blinking” is activated up to a maximum of
6 mph (10 km/h) above the limit detected by
the system.
If no speed limit signs are found, the system
will revert to the speed limit signs that are
stored in the NAV system.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the car in the event that the TJA
system disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel when the TJA system is activated.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
The TJA system should only be used as a
driving aid. The driver must always pay
attention to their surroundings when the
system is operating and be ready to take
control of the vehicle at any time.
Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers) which
could interfere with the hand detection
sensor on the steering wheel.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
113
(Continued)
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The system status can always be viewed through
the instrument cluster display.
The instrument cluster display shows only the
speed limit indications and consists of the
following steps:
The new speed limit recognized by the system,
which is indicated by means of a
predetermined color. The road sign indicating
the end of the speed limit or a “Road Sign Not
Detected” message may appear in this zone.
After a predetermined distance, the previously
displayed road sign changes color to inform
the driver that the speed limit provided may no
longer be valid.
1 — Traffic Sign Recognized
INTELLIGENT SPEED
CONTROL (ISC) SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Intelligent Speed Control (ISC) system is
always paired with the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system. The ISC system suggests an
automatic speed adjustment to the driver based
on the speed limit for the road being traveled. The
driver can decide whether to accept or reject the
automatic speed adjustment, using the switch on
the steering wheel.
If the speed limit is exceeded according to the
road signs or traffic conditions, a dedicated
graphic message is displayed on the instrument
cluster display.
RES/SET Switch
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the vehicle in the event that the TJA
system disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel when the TJA system is activated.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
CAUTION!
Functionality may be limited or the system
may not work if the sensor is obstructed.
The system may have limited operation or
not work at all in weather conditions such as
heavy rain, hail, thick fog, and low
temperatures. Strong light contrasts can
influence the recognition capability of the
sensor.
The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
Do not tamper or perform any operations in
the area of the windshield glass directly
surrounding the sensor.
Clean foreign matters such as bird
droppings, insects, snow or ice on the
windshield. Use specific detergents and
clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
STARTING AND OPERATING
114
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
To Activate
The system can be activated in the radio system
within the Driver Assistance menu. The symbol
illuminates in the instrument cluster display
when the system is active.
1 — ISC System Active
To Deactivate
The system is deactivated under the following
conditions:
When the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
system is deactivated
When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system is deactivated
NOTE:
Selecting “Speed Offset” allows the driver to set
the speed up to a maximum of 10 mph (16 km/h)
above or below the suggested speed set by the ISC
system. In this instance, the road sign information
shown in the instrument cluster display will
continue to be detected by the TSR system.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The system status is indicated by a white or green
icon in the instrument cluster display (similar to
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) device) to the
left of the road sign indications provided by the
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system.
ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION OF THE
S
UGGESTED SPEED
The system can be activated if the driver has
activated the following systems beforehand:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
When these systems are active, a telltale will
display in the instrument cluster display
indicating the suggested speed provided by the
TSR system. The driver has the option to accept
or reject this using the RES/SET switch on the
steering wheel.
To accept the proposed speed and adjust the
speed set by ACC, move the RES/SET switch up or
down in the direction indicated in the telltale.
To reject the proposed speed, move the RES/SET
switch up or down in the direction opposite of the
arrow in the telltale. The ACC system will continue
to regulate to the previously set speed.
If the speed set by the ACC system is the same as
the speed detected by the TSR system, the speed
limit indicator on the instrument cluster display
will be highlighted with a green circle.
1 — Suggested Speed Higher Than Current Speed
2 — Suggested Speed Lower Than Current Speed
1 —Road Sign Recognized
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
115
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the
rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible
collision with an obstacle.
When the REVERSE gear is engaged and the
system is on, the front and rear sensors are
activated. If the vehicle moves from REVERSE to
a forward gear, the rear sensors are deactivated,
while the front sensors remain active until the
speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.
NOTE:
In certain operating conditions, the system could
start detecting an obstacle only after the vehicle
has moved slightly (a few inches).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The ParkSense sensors located in the rear
fascia/bumper and (if equipped) in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. These sensors detect the presence of any
obstacles and warn the driver through an
acoustic signal and visual indications, which will
be displayed on the instrument cluster display.
Front Sensor Locations
Rear Sensor Locations
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The driver can select the type of warning they
would like to be displayed through the radio
system. To access the function on the main
menu, select in the following order:
1. Driver Assistance
2. ParkSense
3. Mode
4. Sound and Display
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense system is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected when
they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense system in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense
system.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
STARTING AND OPERATING
116
Visual Indications
The system indicates the presence of an obstacle
by displaying a single red arc in the detected
area, in relation to the distance of the object and
the position of the vehicle.
If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear
central area, a single red arc will be displayed as
the obstacle approaches, first constant, then
flashing, in addition to an acoustic signal.
If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear left
and/or right area, a single red flashing arc will be
shown in the corresponding area on the display
and the system will emit an acoustic signal, either
at frequent intervals or constantly.
In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstacle
when a single red flashing arc is shown on the
display and the acoustic signal becomes
continuous.
If several obstacles are detected simultaneously
in the front and rear area, the display will show all
of them, regardless of the area in which they were
detected.
It is not possible to exit from the display screen
while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Acoustic Signal
In the presence of an obstacle at the front or the
rear of the vehicle, an acoustic signal with
variable frequency will sound:
The acoustic signal increases in frequency as
the distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle decreases.
The acoustic signal becomes continuous when
the distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is less than 11 inches (30 cm), and
stops if the distance increases.
The acoustic signal is constant if the distance
between the vehicle and the obstacle is
unchanged.
NOTE:
If the sensors detect several front and rear obsta-
cles, the closest obstacle is considered. An inter-
mittent signal will sound if the obstacles are at
the same distance (front and rear).
When the system emits an acoustic signal, the
volume of the radio system, if activated, is
automatically lowered.
An acoustic signal will not sound if the vehicle is
in PARK.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
For vehicles only equipped with rear sensors, to
turn the system off, push the ParkSense button
located to the left of the headlight switch. The
indicator light within the button will illuminate
when the system is turned off. Pushing the button
a second time will turn the system back on, and
the indicator light will turn off.
ParkSense System On/Off Button
For vehicles equipped with front and rear
sensors, to turn the front parking sensors off,
push the ParkSense button located to the left of
the headlight switch. The indicator light within the
switch will illuminate when the system is turned
off. Pushing the button a second time will turn the
front sensors back on, and the indicator light will
turn off.
NOTE:
Deactivation of both the front and rear parking
sensors can only be done through the radio
system.
The indicator light within the ParkSense system
switch will also be on in case of system failure. If
the switch is pushed with a system failure, the
indicator light will flash for approximately five
seconds. The light will then stay on constantly.
NOTE:
When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ParkSense system keeps the last state
when the engine was stopped (activated or deac-
tivated) in its memory.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated
when REVERSE is engaged by a message on the
instrument cluster display
Ú
page 70.
In case of system failure, a dedicated message
appears on the instrument cluster for about five
seconds.
Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: If the
display shows a message requiring the
sensors to be cleaned, make sure that the
outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear bumpers are free of debris (e.g. snow,
mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear,
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
117
(Continued)
place the ignition in the OFF position, then
return it to ON/RUN. If the message is still
displayed, contact an authorized dealer.
Audio System Not Available: If the display
shows a message that the audio system is not
available, it means that the acoustic signal will
be emitted by the instrument panel, and not
through the vehicle’s speakers.
OPERATION WITH A TRAILER
The operation of the ParkSense system is
automatically deactivated when a trailer’s
electrical connector is plugged into the vehicle.
The sensors are automatically reactivated when
the electrical connector is removed.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Some conditions may influence the performance
of the ParkSense system:
Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due to the
presence of ice, snow, mud, or thick paint on
the surface of the sensor.
The sensors may detect a false obstacle (echo
interference) due to mechanical interference,
for example when washing the vehicle or in
extreme weather.
The signals sent by the sensors can be altered
by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g.
pneumatic brake systems of trucks or
pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.
System performance can be influenced by the
position of the sensors. For example, due to a
change in the ride setting (caused by wear to
the shock absorbers or suspension), by
changing tires, overloading the vehicle or
operations that require the vehicle to be
lowered.
Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other
adhesives over the sensors as this will affect
system performance.
The presence of a trailer hitch without a trailer.
This may interfere with the operation of the
parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense
system, it is recommended to remove or close
the trailer hitch assembly when the vehicle is
not being used for towing.
LANE DEPARTURE
WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING OPERATION
The Lane Departure Warning system uses a
forward looking camera located on the
windshield to detect lane markings and measure
vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When one or both lane limits are detected and
the vehicle passes over one without an activated
turn signal, the system emits a visual as well as
an acoustic signal.
If the vehicle continues to go beyond the line of
the lane without any intervention from the driver,
the surpassed line will light up on the display (left
or right) to urge the driver to bring the vehicle
back into the limits of the lane.
WARNING!
Before using the ParkSense system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used
for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkSense system.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
STARTING AND OPERATING
118
(Continued)
TURNING LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
O
N OR OFF
The system is activated/deactivated by pushing
the button located on the end of the
multifunction lever, or through the Driver
Assistance widget in the radio system.
Lane Departure Warning System Activation/
Deactivation Button
NOTE:
The Lane Departure Warning system will retain
the last system state on or off from the last igni-
tion cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position.
Activation Conditions
Once turned on, the system becomes active only
if the following conditions are met:
The vehicle speed is equal to or above 37 mph
(60 km/h); the system is deactivated at
speeds equal to or greater than 110 mph
(180 km/h).
The lane markings are visible at least on one
side.
There are suitable visibility conditions.
The road is straight or with wide radius bends.
A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in
front.
The turn signal is not active.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING MESSAGE
The Lane Departure Warning system advises the
driver when the vehicle leaves the driving lane by
showing symbols and messages on the
instrument cluster display.
When the system is active and the lane markings
have not been detected, the display shows two
grey lane lines.
Lane Markings Not Detected
CAUTION!
Projecting loads on the roof of the vehicle
may interfere with the correct operation of
the camera. Before starting, make sure the
load is correctly positioned in order not to
cover the camera operating range.
Do not cover the operating range of the
camera with stickers or other objects.
Do not tamper with nor operate on the
camera. Do not close the openings in the
aesthetic cover located under the interior
rearview mirror. In the event of a failure of
the camera, contact an authorized dealer.
The camera may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such as:
heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, or
formation of ice layers on the windshield.
Camera operation may also be compromised
by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt
or ice on the windshield, by traffic conditions
(e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with
yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or
opposite way on the same lane, bend with a
small radius of curvature), by road surface
conditions and by driving conditions (e.g.
off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is
always clean. Use specific detergents and
clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield. The camera operation may also
be limited or absent in some driving, traffic
and road surface conditions.
If the windshield must be replaced due to
scratches, chipping or breakage, contact
exclusively an authorized dealer. Do not
replace the windshield on your own. It is
advisable to replace the windshield if it is
damaged in the area of the camera.
CAUTION!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
119
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the system is active and only, for example,
the left lane marking has been detected, the
detected lane illuminates in white on the display.
The system is then ready to provide visual
warnings on the display in the event of uninten-
tional exiting of the lane (turn signal not
activated) to the left.
Left Lane Marking Detected
When the system detects that the vehicle has
approached the lane line and is about to pass it,
the left line on the display illuminates in yellow.
Left Lane Marking Approached
The system operates in the same way, but
mirrored, in the event of exiting the right lane
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the system is active, both lane lines on the
display illuminate in white to indicate that both of
the lane markings have been detected.
When lane markings are detected, the system is
ready to provide indications in case the driver
unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not
activated).
As the Lane Departure Warning system detects
the lane markings while the vehicle is in motion,
it will adjust the display accordingly (from white to
yellow and yellow to white, and increase their
thickness).
If a lane line is crossed, the driver is alerted by an
audible signal as well as the visual indication in
the instrument cluster. The signal is emitted
through the speakers on the side of the lane limit
which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicle is
exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible
signal will come from the speakers on the left of
the vehicle).
Limited Operation Warning
If a message appears on the display, a condition
limiting the Lane Departure Warning system
operation may have occurred. This could be an
obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the
system.
If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the
windshield by the interior rearview mirror.
Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal
conditions, the system may not function properly.
When the conditions limiting the system are
corrected, it will go back to normal operation.
Should a fault persist, contact an authorized
dealer.
System Failure Warning
If the system turns off and appears on the
display, it means that there is a system fault.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle,
but you are advised to contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
CHANGING LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
S
TATUS
The system's sensitivity can be set through the
radio system. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” can be
selected.
To access the function, from the main menu
select the following in order:
1. Driver Assistance
2. Lane Departure Warning
3. Sensitivity
LANE KEEPING ASSIST
(LKA) SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system uses a
camera located on the windshield to detect the
lane markings and calculate the position of the
vehicle within such markings, in order to make
sure that the vehicle remains inside the lane. This
is an active system that will apply torque to the
steering wheel if it senses that the vehicle is
drifting out of the lane.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
STARTING AND OPERATING
120
When one or both lane markings are detected
and the vehicle passes over one without a turn
signal being applied, the system will apply torque
to the steering wheel and a visual signal will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display. An
audible signal may also sound.
If the vehicle continues to go beyond the lane line
without any driver intervention, the surpassed
lane line (left or right) will light up on the
instrument cluster display to urge the driver to
bring the vehicle back inside the lane markings.
Lane Crossed
TURNING LANE KEEPING ASSIST ON OR
O
FF
The system is activated/deactivated by pressing
the button at the end of the multifunction lever.
Each time the engine is started, the system
maintains the operating mode that was selected
when it was previously turned off.
Activation/Deactivation Button
Activation Conditions
Once the activation button is pushed, the system
becomes active only if the following conditions
are met:
The car speed is higher than 37 mph
(60 km/h) (the system is deactivated at
speeds equal to or higher than 110 mph
(180 km/h))
The lane limit lines are visible at least on one
side
There are suitable visibility conditions
The road is straight or with wide radius bends
A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in
front
The turn signal (to indicate leaving the lane) is
not active
LANE KEEPING ASSIST WARNING
M
ESSAGE
The Lane Keeping Assist system also advises the
driver when the car changes lanes by showing
symbols and messages on the instrument cluster
display.
The message at the top of the display remains
active only until the main reconfigurable area of
the display is activated by pressing the TRIP
button located on the end of the windshield wiper
lever
Ú
page 66.
After activating the main reconfigurable area, the
Lane Keeping Assist system messages will be
shown in the instrument cluster display.
When the system is active and the lane markings
have not been detected, the display shows two
grey lane lines.
Lane Markings Not Detected
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
121
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the system is active and only, for example,
the left lane marking has been detected, the
detected lane lights up in white on the display.
The system is then ready to provide visual
warnings on the display in the event of uninten-
tional exiting of the lane (turn signal indicator not
activated) to the left.
Left Lane Marking Detected
When the system detects that the vehicle has
approached the lane marking and is about to
pass it, the left line on the display lights up in
yellow.
Left Lane Marking Approached
NOTE:
The system operates in the same way, but
mirrored, in the event of exiting the right lane
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the system is active, both lane lines on the
display illuminate in white to indicate the
successful detection of both limits.
When lane markings are detected, the system is
ready to provide indications in case the driver
unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not
activated).
As the Lane Keeping Assist system detects the
lane markings while the vehicle is in motion, it will
adjust the display accordingly (from white to
yellow and yellow to white, and increase their
thickness).
If a lane line is crossed, the driver is alerted by an
audible signal as well as the visual indication in
the instrument cluster. The signal is emitted
through the speakers on the side of the lane
marking which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicle
is exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible
signal will come from the speakers on the left of
the vehicle).
Hands Presence On The Steering Wheel
Detection
The system is able to detect the presence of the
driver’s hands on the steering wheel.
When the system does not detect the presence of
hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds
(up to 6 seconds), the following screen will be
displayed on the instrument cluster display. No
acoustic warning will be emitted in this case.
Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not
Detected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)
When the system does not detect the presence of
hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds
(from 6 to 15 seconds), the following screen will
be displayed on the instrument cluster display. A
short acoustic signal will sound if hands are not
detected on the steering wheel for 6 to 12 sec-
onds. A continuous signal will sound if hands are
not detected on the steering wheel for 12 to
15 seconds.
Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not
Detected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
STARTING AND OPERATING
122
(Continued)
After 15 seconds with the hands removed from
the steering wheel, the LKA system will be
deactivated and a dedicated message will be
shown on the instrument cluster display. A short
acoustic signal will sound in this case.
In any of the situations above where the hands
are removed from the steering wheel for more
than 6 seconds, it is necessary to reposition the
hands on the steering wheel.
Changing The System Sensitivity
The system's sensitivity can be set through the
radio system in the Driver Assistance menu.
Select “Lane Keep Assist - Settings” and then
“Keeping sensitivity”. Sensitivity “Early” or “Late”
can be selected.
Changing The System Strength
The system’s strength can be set through the
radio system in the Driver Assistance menu.
Select “Lane Keep Assist - Settings” and then
“Strength”. Strength “Low” or “High” can be
selected.
Limited Operation Warning
If a message appears on the display, a condition
limiting the LKA system operation may have
occurred. This could be an obstruction of the
camera view, or a fault in the system.
If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the
windshield by the interior rearview mirror.
Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal
conditions, the system may not function properly.
When the conditions limiting the system are
corrected, it will go back to normal operation.
Should a fault persist, contact an authorized
dealer.
System Failure Signaling
If the system turns off and appears on the
display, it means that there is a system fault.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle,
but you are advised to contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
REAR BACK UP CAMERA /
DYNAMIC GRIDLINES
The Rear Back Up Camera is located on the
liftgate, above the rear license plate.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
CAUTION!
Projecting loads on the roof of the vehicle
may interfere with the correct operation of
the camera. Before starting, make sure the
load is correctly positioned, in order not to
cover the camera operating range.
If the windshield must be replaced due to
scratches, chips or breakage, contact an
authorized dealer. Do not replace the
windshield on your own; there is risk of
malfunction. It is advisable to replace the
windshield if it is damaged in the area of the
camera.
Do not tamper with or operate on the camera.
Do not close the openings in the aesthetic
cover located under the interior rearview
mirror. In the event of a failure of the camera,
contact an authorized dealer immediately.
Do not cover the operating range of the
camera with stickers or other objects. Also
pay attention to other objects on the hood
(e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure they do
not interfere with the camera.
The camera may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such as:
heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, or
formation of ice layers on the windshield.
Camera operation may also be compromised
by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or
ice on the windshield, traffic conditions (e.g.
vehicles that are driving not aligned with
yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or
opposite way on the same lane, bend with a
small radius of curvature), or road surface
conditions and driving conditions (e.g.
off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is
always clean. Use specific detergents and
clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield. The camera operation may also
be limited or absent in some driving, traffic
and road surface conditions.
CAUTION!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
123
Camera Activation/Deactivation
To activate the Rear Back Up Camera features,
select “Driver Assistance” from the Main Menu of
the radio system. Under Driver Assistance, Rear
Back Up Camera features can be selected:
View
Camera Delay
Camera Guidelines
Selecting “View” will activate the camera view on
the display.
Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the camera
view to remain on the display shortly after the
vehicle is no longer in REVERSE, followed by the
previously active screen.
Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will activate the
display of the dynamic guidelines that indicate
the route of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the radio system
display will show the area behind the vehicle, as
seen by the Rear Back Up Camera, along with a
warning message.
Rear Back Up Camera Display
When enabled in the radio settings, active
guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup
path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of
the vehicle to assist in rear parking maneuvers or
trailer hitch alignment. Different colored zones
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Messages On The Display
If the liftgate is opened, the camera will not detect
any obstacle behind the vehicle. The display will
show a dedicated warning message.
Make sure the liftgate is closed by pushing next to
the lock until it clicks.
Important Notes
Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the camera
may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to
keep the camera surface clean, and free from
debris.
When parking, be aware of obstacles that may
be above or below the camera range.
Area
Distance From The
Rear Of The Vehicle
Red
0–11.8 inches
(0–30 cm)
Yellow
11.8 inches to 3.3 feet
(30 cm–1 m)
Green
3.3 feet or more
(1 m or more)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using the Rear Back
Up Camera to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using the Rear Back Up Camera.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
STARTING AND OPERATING
124
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Before refueling, make sure that the fuel type is
correct.
Also, stop the engine before refueling.
NOTE:
An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful
exhaust emissions, thus contributing to air pollu-
tion.
REFUELING CAPACITY
To ensure that you fill the tank completely, top off
twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle.
Further top-off could cause faults in the fuel
feeding system.
REFUELING PROCEDURE
The fuel filler door is unlocked when the central
door locking system is unlocked. It is automat-
ically locked when the central locking system is
applied.
Opening The Fuel Filler Door
To refuel proceed as follows:
1. Open fuel filler door by pushing on the point
shown by the arrow.
Fuel Door
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
before removing the nozzle, wait for at least
10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside
the tank.
5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten the gas
cap about ¼ turn until you hear one click.
This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED
FUEL = gasoline).
Fuel Door Label
Emergency Fuel Door Opening
In the event of an emergency, the fuel filler door
can be opened from inside the liftgate.
Proceed as follows:
Models With Compact Spare Tire
1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load floor.
Load Floor
CAUTION!
Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even
in small amounts in an emergency, as this
would damage the catalytic converter beyond
repair.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
125
(Continued)
2. Unlock the locking device and remove the
compact spare tire to reach the emergency
opening cable on the side of the fuel door.
Cargo Area
3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door lock.
Release Cable
4. Open the fuel door by pushing it.
Models Without Compact Spare Tire
1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load floor.
Load Floor
2. Lift up the cover to reach the emergency
opening cable on the side of the fuel door.
Cargo Box
3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door lock.
Cargo Box Opened
4. Open the fuel door by pushing it.
1 — Locking Device
1 — Release Cable
1 — Cover
2 — Release Cable
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
STARTING AND OPERATING
126
NOTE:
If the filler compartment is washed with a pres-
sure washer, keep it at a distance of at least
8 inches (20 cm).
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door
or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that
appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options
and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of
each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased
durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with
no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle.
The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the
total load is within the specified GVWR. If so,
weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear
to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and
handles and the way the brakes operate.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
127
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow
your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú
page 126.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer
in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú
page 126.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are the most popular on
the market today and they are commonly used to
tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by
applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They
are typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer Sway Control and a
weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with the hitch and trailer
manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
STARTING AND OPERATING
128
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer towing is not permissible with the 2.9L engine.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
2.0L Engine 3,000 lb (1360 kg) 300 lb (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on
the Tire and Loading Information placard.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
129
(Continued)
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total
load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading
Information” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads bal-
anced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer.
Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance, or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. Always block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
• GVWR
• GTW
• GAWR
• Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
STARTING AND OPERATING
130
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For proper tire inflation procedures
Ú
page 216.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle with
that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate
braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge
actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at
full throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can
overload your brake system and cause it to
fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so
could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
131
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you
experience speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to
cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
INSTALLING THE RECEIVER
To properly install the receiver, see the following
directions:
1. Retrieve the receiver from the luggage
compartment.
2. Push the receiver into the trailer hitch, and
secure by inserting the locking pin into the
trailer hitch.
3. Insert the safety split ring into the hole on the
locking pin.
NOTE:
Ensure that the locking pin is removed from the
trailer hitch before installing the receiver.
Trailer Hitch And Receiver
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
1 – Receiver
2 – Locking Pin
3 – Safety Split Ring
A – Trailer Hitch
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
STARTING AND OPERATING
132
CONNECTING THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To connect the trailer’s electrical system, see the
following directions:
1. Remove the socket protective cover.
2. Completely insert the plug into the socket.
Electrical Tow Connector
REMOVING THE RECEIVER
When the receiver is no longer needed,
disconnect the electrical connections and
remove it from its position using the following
directions:
1. Remove the safety split ring from the locking
pin.
2. Pull the locking pin out of the trailer hitch.
3. Remove the receiver from the trailer hitch.
SUGGESTIONS FOR
DRIVING
SAVING FUEL
The following suggestions may help you save fuel
and lower the amount of harmful emissions
released into the atmosphere.
Vehicle Maintenance
Checks and operations should be carried out in
accordance with the Maintenance Plan
Ú
page 191.
Tires
Check the tire pressures at least once every four
weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption
levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher.
NOTE:
Tire pressure that is too high can cause prema-
ture tire wear, reduced control, etc.
Unnecessary Loads
Do not travel with an overloaded liftgate. The
weight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly
affect fuel consumption and stability.
Electric Devices
Use electrical systems only for the amount of
time needed. The rear window defroster,
additional headlights, windshield wipers and
heater blower fan require a considerable amount
of energy; increasing the current uptake
increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% when
city driving).
Climate Control System
Using the climate control system will increase
consumption: use standard ventilation when the
temperature outside permits.
Devices For Aerodynamic Control
The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic
control may adversely affect air drag and
consumption levels.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs
when the vehicle is stationary; this causes the
engine to warm up more slowly, thereby
increasing fuel consumption and emissions. It is
therefore advisable to drive off immediately,
slowly, avoiding high speeds: by doing this the
engine will warm up more quickly.
Pin
Number
Function
1 Lights ground (Lights GND)
2
Position light, side marker
lights, and license plate light
3 Left turn signal and stop light
4 Right turn signal and stop light
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
133
Unnecessary Actions
Avoid revving up when starting at traffic lights or
before stopping the engine. This action is
unnecessary and causes increased fuel
consumption and pollution.
Gear Selection
Use a high gear when traffic and road conditions
allow it. Using a low gear for faster acceleration
will increase fuel consumption. Improper use of a
high gear increases consumption, emissions and
engine wear.
Maximum Speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases as
speed increases. Maintain a constant speed,
avoiding unnecessary braking and acceleration,
which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and
emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently severely affects consumption
and emissions: acceleration should be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum torque.
CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold Starting
Short trips and frequent cold starts will not allow
the engine to reach optimum operating
temperature. This results in a significant increase
in consumption levels (from +15 to +30% in city
driving) and emissions.
Traffic And Road Conditions
High fuel consumption is caused by heavy traffic,
for instance when traveling in traffic with frequent
use of low gears or in cities with many traffic
lights. Winding mountain roads and rough road
surfaces also adversely affect consumption.
Stops In Traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. railway crossings),
turn off the engine.
PERFORMANCE — QUADRIFOGLIO
This vehicle is equipped with an engine capable
of delivering exceptionally fast acceleration and
speed:
Peak power: 505 HP at 6,500 RPM.
Peak torque: 443 ft-lb at 2,500–5,000 RPM.
Top speed: 176 mph (283 km/h).
Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h):
3.6 seconds.
For safe driving, it is essential, particularly during
the first days of use, to get to know the car by
driving carefully and gradually discovering its
performance.
Brakes
The car braking system may be available with four
carbon ceramic material brake discs, one on
each wheel.
In order to guarantee the maximum braking
capacity for the first use, Alfa Romeo performs a
"run-in" procedure for discs and pads directly at
the factory.
The use of carbon ceramic material brake discs
guarantees braking features (better
deceleration/pedal load ratio, braking distances,
fading resistance) proportional to the dynamic
features of the car in addition to considerably
decreasing the unsprung component weight.
The materials used and the structural features of
the system could generate unusual noises which
have absolutely no adverse effect on correct
operation and reliability of the braking system.
Greater pressure may need to be applied to the
brake pedal the first time to keep the same
braking capacities in presence of condensation
or salt on the braking surfaces, for example after
washing or if the car is not used for a long time.
NOTE:
Given the high technological level of this system,
any servicing on it must be performed by an
authorized dealer which exclusively has the skills
needed for the repair and maintenance opera-
tions.
In case of intensive, high-performance use of the
car, have the efficiency of the carbon ceramic
material braking system inspected as shown on
the Maintenance Plan at an authorized dealer.
Driving On Race Tracks
Before driving on a track using a racing style, it is
necessary to:
Attend a race track driving course.
Check the liquid levels in the engine
compartment
Ú
page 191.
Have the car inspected at an authorized
dealer.
Remember that the car was not designed to be
driven exclusively on the race track and that this
use increases stress and component wear.
NOTE:
Quadrifoglio front brakes are equipped with
Non-Asbestos Organic (NAO) type pads. These
pads are NOT suitable for high thermal loads (for
example track use). If you plan to use vehicle on
a track it is recommended to use the optional
CCM Brakes (Carbon Ceramic Brake disc).
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
STARTING AND OPERATING
134
Preheating the carbon ceramic material brake
discs
The brake discs must be warmed up to make
them fully efficient. Perform the following
procedure to achieve optimal efficiency:
Brake nine times from 80 mph to 18 mph
(130 km/h to 30 km/h) with deceleration
equal to 0.7g (the longitudinal acceleration
value is shown on the instrument cluster
display by setting RACE mode and selecting
the “Performance” page) with 20 second
intervals between brake applications; keep the
car at a speed comprised between 37 mph
and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and do
not brake for 4 minutes to allow the brakes to
cool down.
Then brake three times from 124 mph to
18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with
deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS operation)
with 30 second intervals between brake
applications; keep the car at a speed
comprised between 37 mph and 62 mph
(60 km/h and 100 km/h) and do not brake for
5 minutes to allow the brakes to cool down.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
135
(Continued)
This very important section describes the safety
systems that your vehicle may be equipped with,
and provides instructions on how to use them
correctly.
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS
The vehicle may be equipped with the following
active safety devices:
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System
Drive Train Control (DTC) System
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System
Hill Descent Control (HDC) System
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System
Traction Control System (TCS)
For system operation, see the following pages.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
An integral part of the braking system, the ABS
prevents one or more wheels from locking and
slipping in all road surface conditions, regardless
of the intensity of the braking action. The system
ensures that the vehicle can be controlled even
during emergency braking, allowing the driver to
optimize stopping distances.
The system intervenes during braking when the
wheels are about to lock, typically in emergency
braking or low-grip conditions where locking may
be more frequent.
The system also improves control and stability of
the vehicle when braking on a surface where the
grip of the left and right wheels varies, such as in
a corner.
The Electronic Braking Force Distribution (EBD)
system works with the ABS, allowing the brake
force to be distributed between the front and rear
wheels.
System Intervention
The ABS equipped on this vehicle is provided with
the "Brake-By-Wire", Integrated Brake System
(IBS), function. With this system, the command
given by pressing the brake pedal is not
transmitted hydraulically, but electrically.
Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the
pedal with the traditional system is no longer
noticeable.
ACTIVE TORQUE VECTORING (ATV)
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The dynamic drive control is used to optimize and
balance the drive torque between the wheels of
the same axles. The ATV system improves the grip
in turns, sending more drive torque to the
external wheel.
Given that, in a turn, the external wheels of the
car travel more than the internal ones and
therefore turn faster, sending a higher thrust to
the external rear wheel allows for the car to be
more stable and to not suffer an "understeer"
condition. Understeer occurs when the vehicle is
turning less than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed
or high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead to
a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136
(Continued)
DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE (DST)
S
YSTEM
DST uses the integration of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system with the electric
power steering to increase the safety level of the
whole vehicle.
In critical situations (e.g. braking on surfaces with
different grip conditions), the ESC system
influences the steering through the DST function
to implement an additional torque contribution
on the steering wheel in order to suggest the
most correct maneuver to the driver.
The coordinated action of the brakes and
steering increases the safety and control of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly depen-
dent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reac-
tion to the applied torque. It is very important to
realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL (DTC) SYSTEM
Some models of this vehicle are equipped with an
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, which offers an
optimal drive for countless driving conditions and
road surfaces. The system reduces tire slipping to
a minimum, automatically redistributing the
torque to the front and rear wheels as needed.
To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with AWD
automatically passes to Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD)
when the road and environmental conditions are
such that they wouldn't cause the tires to slip.
When the road and environmental conditions
require better traction, the vehicle automatically
switches to AWD mode.
NOTE:
There may be a brief delay in shifting to AWD
mode after a tire slipping event occurs.
If the system failure symbol switches on, after
starting the engine or while driving, it means
that the AWD system is not working properly. If
the warning message activates frequently, it is
recommended to carry out the maintenance
operations.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)
S
YSTEM
The ESC system improves the directional control
and stability of the vehicle in various driving
conditions.
The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s understeer
and oversteer, distributing the brake force on the
appropriate wheels. The torque supplied by the
engine can also be reduced in order to maintain
control of the vehicle.
The ESC system uses sensors installed on the
vehicle to determine the path that the driver
intends to follow and compares it with the
vehicle’s effective path. When the real path
deviates from the desired path, the ESC system
intervenes to counter the vehicle’s oversteer or
understeer.
Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is turning
more than it should according to the angle of
the steering wheel.
Understeer occurs when the vehicle is turning
less than it should according to the angle of
the steering wheel.
System Intervention
The intervention of the system is indicated by the
flashing of the ESC Warning Light on the
instrument panel, to inform the driver that the
vehicle stability and grip are critical.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY
137
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The HDC function is an integral part of the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system, keeping
the vehicle at a constant speed while descending
a hill by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC aims to create vehicle stability and safer
driving in various situations, including poor grip
conditions and steep descents.
The system has three different modes:
Off: the system is deactivated
Enabled: the system is enabled and ready to
intervene when the activation conditions are
met
Active: the system actively controls the vehicle
speed
Enabling The System
To enable the system, push the HDC switch
located on the steering wheel.
HDC Switch
The system is enabled if the car speed is below
20 mph (30 km/h). The system stays enabled
until the car speed reaches 37 mph (60 km/h),
the system is disabled at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h).
Activation of the HDC system is indicated by the
white icon appearing in the instrument cluster
display.
HDC Symbol
Activation Of The System
Once enabled, the HDC system will activate
automatically if the vehicle is driven on a downhill
slope with sufficient gradient, greater than 8%.
The speed set for the HDC system can be
adjusted using the SET switch located on the
steering wheel.
HDC Speed SET Switch
Once the desired speed has been reached,
release the SET switch and the HDC system will
maintain the set speed. After set speed is
established, the HDC system will automatically
brake to keep the vehicle at the set speed if the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle gets
close to the set speed.
It is possible to reduce the set speed with the
brake pedal. When the pedal is released, the
system will adjust the set speed to the new
current speed.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and
size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
SAFETY
138
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
but remains below 37 mph (60 km/h) and the
accelerator pedal is released, as soon as the
vehicle gets close to the set speed the HDC
system will automatically brake to keep the
vehicle at the set speed.
The driver can cancel HDC system intervention at
any time by pressing the accelerator pedal.
System Deactivation
The HDC system will be deactivated, but remain
available, if any of the following conditions are
met:
The vehicle is traveling on a downhill slope
with a gradient less than 8%, on a level
surface, or on an uphill grade.
PARK (P) mode is engaged.
Disabling The System
The system is disabled if any of the following
conditions are met:
The HDC switch is pressed.
Cruise Control/Adaptive Cruise Control is
activated.
A vehicle speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is
exceeded.
System deactivation is shown by the icon on
the display turning off.
HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM
HSA is an integral part of the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system that facilitates starting on
slopes, activating automatically in the following
cases:
Uphill: the vehicle is stationary on a road with
a gradient higher than 5%, the engine is
running, the brake is pressed, and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or a gear other
than REVERSE (R) is engaged.
Downhill: the vehicle is stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, the engine is
running, the brake is pressed, and the
transmission is in REVERSE.
When starting to move forward from a complete
stop, the ESC system control unit maintains the
braking pressure on the wheels until the engine
torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any
case for a maximum of two seconds, allowing
your right foot to be moved easily from the brake
pedal to the accelerator.
The system will automatically deactivate after
two seconds without starting, gradually releasing
the braking pressure. During this release stage, it
is possible to hear a typical mechanical brake
release noise, indicating the imminent
movement of the vehicle.
PANIC BRAKE ASSIST (PBA) SYSTEM
The PBA system is designed to improve the
vehicle’s braking capacity during emergency
braking.
The system detects emergency braking by
monitoring the speed and force with which the
brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies
the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the
braking distance; the PBA system therefore
complements the ABS.
Maximum assistance from the PBA system is
obtained by pressing the brake pedal very
quickly. In addition, the brake pedal should be
pressed continuously during braking, avoiding
intermittent presses, to get the most out of the
system. Do not reduce pressure on the brake
pedal until braking is no longer necessary.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for main-
taining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake oper-
ation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
139
The PBA system is deactivated when the brake
pedal is released.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
The TCS automatically operates in the event of
slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (hydroplaning),
and acceleration on one or both drive wheels on
roads that are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending
on the slipping conditions, two different control
systems are activated:
If the slipping involves both drive wheels, the
system intervenes, reducing the power
transmitted by the engine.
If the slipping only involves one of the drive
wheels, the Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
function is activated, automatically braking the
wheel which is slipping (the behavior of a
self-locking differential is simulated). This will
increase the engine torque transferred to the
wheel which isn't slipping.
System Intervention
The intervention of the system is indicated by the
flashing of the ESC Warning Light on the
instrument panel, to inform the driver that the
vehicle stability and grip are critical.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
The following auxiliary driving systems may be
available in this vehicle:
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — if equipped
Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) — if equipped
Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The vehicle may also be fitted with the following
driving assistance systems:
Driver Attention Assist (DAA)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
Highway Assist System (HAS)
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Intelligent Speed Control (ISC)
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
For the operation of the DAA, LDW, LKA, HAS, TJA,
ACC, ISC, or TSR systems, see
Ú
page 81.
NOTE:
When driving on two-way roads where there is no
lane dividing center line (e.g. on unpaved roads),
the use of the ABSA, HAS, TJA, and LKA systems
is strongly discouraged as the system could
detect the entire road as single-lane dividing
lines.
NOTE:
The driving assistance systems are designed to
aid in driving the car. The driver must always
maintain a sufficient level of attention to the
traffic and road conditions and control the trajec-
tory of the car.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses radar sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect the presence of
other vehicles in the rear side blind spots of your
vehicle.
Rear Sensor Location
WARNING!
The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a PBA-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
SAFETY
140
The system warns the driver about the presence
of other vehicles in the detection area by illumi-
nating the warning light located within the door
mirror on the side in which the other vehicle was
detected. If equipped, an audible chime will also
be heard to alert the driver (if option is selected
within the radio system).
BSM Indicator Light
When the engine is started, the warning light
illuminates briefly to signal the driver that the
system is active.
Sensors
The sensors are activated when any forward gear
is engaged at a speed higher than approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
The sensors are temporarily deactivated when
the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is in PARK.
The detection area of the system covers approxi-
mately one lane on both sides of the vehicle,
which is around 9 ft (3 m).
This area begins from the door mirror and
extends for approximately 19 ft (6 m) towards the
rear part of the vehicle.
When the sensors are active, the system
monitors the detection areas on both sides of the
vehicle and warns the driver about the possible
presence of vehicles in these areas.
While driving, the system monitors the detection
zone in three different situations:
when you are being overtaken by a vehicle;
when you are overtaking a vehicle;
when a vehicle approaches from the side;
to check whether it is necessary to send a signal
to the driver on both sides.
NOTE:
The system does not alert the driver of the
presence of fixed objects (e.g. safety barriers,
poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circum-
stances, the system may activate in the
presence of these objects. This is normal and
does not indicate a system malfunction.
The system does not alert the driver about the
presence of vehicles coming from the opposite
direction, in the adjacent lanes.
If a trailer is hitched to the car, the system
automatically deactivates.
NOTE:
For the system to operate properly, the rear
fascia/bumper area where the radar sensors
are located must stay free from snow, ice and
dirt gathered from the road surface.
Do not cover the rear fascia/bumper area
where the radar sensors are located with any
object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).
If you wish to install a rear tow eye after
purchasing the vehicle, you will need to
deactivate the system via the radio system. To
access the function, select the following items
in sequence on the main menu:
a. “Driver Assistance”
b. “Blind Spot Alert”
Rear View
The system detects vehicles coming from the rear
part of your vehicle on both sides and entering
the rear detection area with a difference in speed
of less than 25 mph (40 km/h) in relation to your
vehicle.
Overtaking Vehicles
If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, with a
difference in speed of less than approximately
15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light on the door mirror of the
corresponding side illuminates.
If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the warning light does not illuminate.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even
if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
141
(Continued)
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System
The Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) system
assists the driver during reverse maneuvers in
the case of reduced visibility.
The RCP system monitors the rear detection areas
on both sides of the vehicle to detect objects
moving toward the sides of the vehicle, with a
minimum speed between approximately 1 mph
(1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving
at a maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in
areas such as parking lots.
The system activation is signaled to the driver by
an audible warning.
NOTE:
If the sensors are covered by objects or
vehicles, the system may not work as intended.
For the system to operate correctly, the rear
fascia/bumper area where the radar sensors
are located must stay free from snow, ice and
dirt gathered from the road surface.
Do not cover the rear fascia/bumper area
where the radar sensors are located with any
object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).
Operating Mode
The system may be activated/deactivated via the
radio system. To access the function, select the
following items on the main menu in sequence:
1. “Driving Assistance”
2. “Blind Spot Alert”
“Blind Spot Alert”, “Visual” Mode
When the system is enabled, the warning light
within the door mirror on the side of the detected
object illuminates.
The visual warning on the mirror will blink if the
driver activates the turn signals, indicating a lane
change.
The warning light will be constant if the driver
stays in the same lane.
“Blind Spot Alert” Function Deactivation
When the system is deactivated (“Blind Spot
Alert” mode off), the BSM or RCP systems will not
emit an audible or a visual warning.
The BSM system will store the operating mode
that was active when the engine was stopped.
Each time the engine is started, the operating
mode stored previously will be recalled and used
Ú
page 247.
ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST (ABSA)
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ABSA system is to help avoid/limit lateral
collisions with cars coming from adjacent lanes
changing the vehicle’s trajectory in order to try to
keep it in the detected lane.
The system warns the driver about the presence
of other vehicles in the detection area by illumi-
nating the warning light located within the door
mirror on the side in which the other vehicle was
detected and by means of an acoustic signal
and/or vibration on the steering wheel and/or
counter-steering torque on the steering wheel (if
the respective item on the “Driver Assistance”
menu is set up and then “Safety” is selected on
the radio system).
When the engine is started, the warning light
illuminates briefly to signal the driver that the
system is active (the warning light comes on even
if the system is activated through the radio
system menu).
ABSA Indicator Light
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to help
a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a park-
ing lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestri-
ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The accident risk persists despite the
application of torque to the steering wheel by
the ABSA system.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
SAFETY
142
Sensors
The system uses radar sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect the presence of
vehicles (cars, trucks, motorbikes, etc.) in the
rear side blind spots of the car.
The sensors are activated when any forward gear
is engaged at a speed higher than about 6 mph
(10 km/h), or when REVERSE (R) is engaged.
The sensors are temporarily deactivated when
the car is stationary and in PARK (P).
The detection area of the system covers about a
lane on both sides of the car around 10 ft
(3 meters).
This area begins from the door mirror and
extends for about 20 ft (6 meters) towards the
rear part of the car.
When the sensors are active the system monitors
the detection areas on both sides of the car and
warns the driver about the possible presence of
cars in these areas.
Rear Sensor Location
While driving, the system monitors the detection
zone in three different situations:
when you are being overtaken by a vehicle;
when you are overtaking a vehicle;
when a vehicle approaches from the side;
to check if it is necessary to intervene in order to
keep the vehicle inside the lane on both sides.
NOTE:
The system does not signal the presence of fixed
object (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).
However, in some circumstances, the system
may activate in the presence of these
objects.This is normal and does not indicate a
system malfunction.
The system does not warn the driver about the
presence of cars coming from the opposite direc-
tion, in the adjacent lanes.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can be activated/deactivated using
the “Driver Assistance” menu in the radio system.
Select signal type, strength levels and sensitivity.
NOTE:
Vehicles with an active system will display the
following screen, on the radio system.
ABSA Menu Screen
System Intervention
The system intervenes in the following
conditions:
the turn signals have been activated;
there is a vehicle in the adjacent lane on the
same side of the turn signal (blind spot area);
lane lines are not correctly detected;
the driver tries to change lanes intentionally.
Applying a torque that corrects the steering
wheel alignment does not always prevent an
accident. It is always the driver's responsi-
bility to steer, brake or accelerate, especially
after the ABSA system warning or after the
steering wheel torque intervention. The
driver is responsible for ensuring that there
are no pedestrians, other vehicles or objects
along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to
comply with these precautions may cause
serious accidents and injuries. The driver is
fully responsible for holding a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead respecting the
highway code in force in the respective
country.
In some cases, the system could apply an
improper torque to the steering wheel. This
application can be interrupted at any time by
turning the steering wheel in the opposite
direction.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
143
If the system detects the presence of a vehicle in
the rear side blind spots of the car, it applies a
torque on the steering wheel (if it has been set
through the “Settings” menu of the radio system),
in order to warn the driver of the need to keep the
car inside the lane and thus avoid collisions with
other vehicles.
The application of torque and vibration is
however only available with car speed between
37 mph (60 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).
The application of torque, as well as of the
vibration, is suppressed/inhibited if:
The torque given by the driver of the steering
wheel is high
Lateral acceleration is high
The trailer is connected to the correct control
module
At least one hand is not detected on the
steering wheel for longer than a specific time
The turn signal is turned off
NOTE:
The steering wheel torque is not applied if the
system is unable to detect a lane and if the turn
signal for the appropriate side has not been
switched on.
The steering wheel detects the presence of the
driver’s hands by a capacitive sensor installed in
the steering wheel and by the applied torque
measured on the steering column.
System Availability
Aggressive driving of the car, or driving on the
median lines, will prevent the correct operation of
the system.
In case of intervention of the stability and braking
systems (FCW, ESC, ABS) they will prevent the
system from operating.
Lane change will disable the system for a certain
period of time.
The road must also comply with some specific
characteristics, such as:
Maximum/minimum lane width.
Clearly identified and defined double yellow
lines and, for a limited period of time, a lane
with a single demarcation line.
NOTE:
In some cases, for a limited period of time, the
system may be activated by a lane with a single
median line.
In cases of good road surface conditions, the
system could correctly recognize other types of
valid lane markings (e.g. road edges, sidewalks,
etc.).
Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Detection
The system is able to detect the presence of the
driver’s hands on the steering wheel.
When the system does not detect the presence of
hands on the steering wheel for 0 to 6 seconds,
the following screen will be displayed on the
instrument cluster display. No acoustic warning
will be emitted in this case.
Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not
Detected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)
When the system does not detect the presence of
hands on the steering wheel from 6 to 15 sec-
onds, the following screen will be displayed on
the instrument cluster display. A short acoustic
signal will sound if hands are not detected on the
steering wheel for 6 to 12 seconds. A continuous
signal will sound if hands are not detected on the
steering wheel for 12 to 15 seconds.
Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not
Detected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
SAFETY
144
After 15 seconds with the hands removed from
the steering wheel, the LKA system will be
deactivated and a dedicated message will be
shown on the instrument cluster display. A short
acoustic signal will sound in this case.
In any of the situations above where the hands
are removed from the steering wheel for more
than 6 seconds, it is necessary to reposition the
hands on the steering wheel.
Changing The System Sensitivity
The system's sensitivity can be set through the
radio system. Select the “Driver Assistance”
menu and then select “Comfort”. Sensitivity
“High” or “Low” can be selected.
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System
The Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) system
assists the driver during reverse maneuvers in
the case of reduced visibility.
When the ABSA system is active, the RCP system
monitors the rear detection areas on both sides of
the vehicle to detect objects moving towards the
sides of the vehicle at a minimum speed between
0.6 mph and 2 mph (1 km/h and 3km/h) from
objects moving at a maximum speed of 22 mph
(35 km/h).
These are generally occurrences that happen in
parking areas.
The system activation is signaled to the driver by
means of a visual and audible warning.
NOTE:
If the sensors are covered by objects or vehicles,
the system may not work as intended.
Changing The System Sensitivity
To change the sensitivity and the strength of the
torque intervention on the steering wheel, refer to
“Settings” of the radio system
Ú
page 247.
DRIVER ATTENTION ASSIST (DAA)
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Driver Attention Assist (DAA) system detects
when the driver is feeling fatigued and warns the
driver to pull over and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
The DAA system can be activated and
deactivated through the radio system by
selecting the following in order:
1. “Driver Assistance”
2. “Driver Attention Assist”
System Intervention
Using information from the front camera, the
system implements two operating logics:
The first operating logic takes the driving style
into account, observing the road and detecting
to what extent the driver can continue driving
with few lane crossing events.
The second operating logic measures the time
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed
above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 110 mph
(180 km/h). If the “Standard” option is
selected, in these conditions, the “Dozy Driver”
message may appear after three hours of
driving. If the “Early” option is selected and
these conditions occur, the “Dozy Driver”
message will be displayed after two hours of
driving.
NOTE:
If the conditions described above are not
detected continuously during the entire driving
period, the “Dozy Driver” message may be
displayed later than two or three hours. If the
driving style indicates that the driver is unable to
follow the road trajectory and respect the hori-
zontal lane markings, the red symbol will appear
on the instrument cluster display to suggest that
the driver should stop for a break. An audible
signal will also sound.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by
the system by pushing the MENU button on the
multifunction lever, the message will disappear
from the display and the symbol will be displayed
in the dedicated area of the instrument cluster
display until the next engine shutdown.
WARNING!
The DAA System is an aid for driving and does
not relieve the driver of the responsibility of
driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue
while driving, pull over safely for a break
without waiting for the DAA to intervene. Only
return to the road when you are in the right
physical and mental condition to prevent
endangering yourself and other drivers.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
145
If the driver ignores the warning provided by the
system and does not stop, the message will
continue to remain on the display, along with the
symbol.
NOTE:
In the event of a DAA system failure, an amber
symbol will appear in the instrument cluster
display along with a dedicated message.
If the ABS system activates, “ABS ACTIVE” will
display in place of the DAA symbol and will
remain active until the ABS system
deactivates.
DAA Warning Message
DAA Warning Icon
Changing The System Sensitivity
The DAA system intervention sensitivity can be
adjusted through the radio system within the
“Driver Assistance” menu.
NOTE:
If “Race” mode (if equipped) is activated, the
DAA system will be automatically deactivated.
The system sensitivity cannot be changed in
the event of a camera system failure.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING PLUS
(FCW+) S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This is a driving assistance system composed of a
radar located behind the front fascia/bumper
and a camera located in the center of the
windshield.
Front Fascia/Bumper Radar Location
Windshield Camera Location
In the event of an imminent collision, the system
intervenes by automatically applying the vehicle’s
brakes to prevent a collision or reduce its effects.
The system provides the driver with audible and
visual signals through specific messages on the
instrument cluster display.
Vehicle Brake Screen
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
SAFETY
146
Pedestrian Brake Screen
The audible and visual signals warn the driver
before the system activates, depending on the
vehicle speed.
NOTE:
No warning signals are generated at speeds
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if
a possible frontal accident is detected (limited
braking). Signals and limited braking are
intended to allow the driver to react promptly, in
order to prevent or reduce the effects of a
potential accident.
In situations with the risk of collision, if the
system detects no intervention by the driver, it
provides automatic braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential frontal collision
(automatic braking). If intervention by the driver
on the brake pedal is detected, but not deemed
sufficient, the system may intervene in order to
improve the reaction of the braking system,
therefore reducing vehicle speed further
(additional assistance in braking stage).
The system will intervene automatically in case of
imminent collision or impact against a pedestrian
crossing the road (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).
NOTE:
For safety reasons, when the vehicle has
stopped, the brake calipers may remain blocked
for about two seconds. Make sure to press the
brake pedal if the vehicle moves slightly forward.
Engagement/Disengagement
The system may be disengaged (and engaged
again) in the “Driver Assistance” menu of the
Information and Entertainment system.
The system can be deactivated even with the
ignition device in the ON position.
NOTE:
The system status can be changed with car at a
standstill only.
Select from three operating modes:
Warning And Braking: the system (if active), in
addition to the visual and audible warnings,
provides limited braking, automatic braking
and additional assistance in the braking stage,
where the driver does not brake sufficiently in
the event of a potential frontal impact.
Only Warning: the system (if active), does not
provide limited braking, but guarantees
automatic braking or additional assistance in
the braking stage, where the driver does not
brake at all or not sufficiently in the event of a
potential frontal impact.
Disabled: the system does not provide visual
and audible warnings, limited braking,
automatic braking or additional assistance in
the braking stage. The system will therefore
provide no indication of a possible collision.
Activation/Deactivation
The Forward Collision Warning system is
activated whenever the engine is started
regardless of what is shown on the radio system.
Following a deactivation, the system will not warn
the driver about the possible collision with a
preceding vehicle, regardless of the setting
selected in the radio system.
NOTE:
Each time the engine is started, the system is
activated regardless of what setting was selected
when the engine was turned off.
This function is not active at a speed lower than
4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than 124 mph
(200 km/h).
The system is active:
Each time the engine is started
When feature is selected within the radio
system
When the ignition is in the ON position
When the vehicle speed is between 2 mph
(4 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
147
When the front seat belts are fastened
The "Alfa DNA Pro" selector is not in RACE
position (if equipped)
NOTE:
If the seat belts of the front seats are not correctly
fastened, the system will not intervene on the
braking system (only audible and visual signals
will be provided).
Changing The System Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the system can be changed
through the Information and Entertainment
system menu, choosing from one of the following
three options: "Near", "Medium" or "Far". Refer to
the description in the Information and
Entertainment system Supplement for how to
change the settings.
The default setting is "Medium". With this setting,
the system warns the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a
standard distance, between that of the other two
settings.
With the system sensitivity set to "Far", the
system will warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a
greater distance, thus providing the possibility of
acting on the brakes more lightly and gradually.
This setting provides the driver with the maximum
possible reaction time to prevent a potential
collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number
of FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
With the option set to "Near", the system will alert
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front when that vehicle is close. This setting
offers the driver a lower reaction time compared
to the "Medium" and "Far" settings, in the event of
a potential collision, but permits more dynamic
driving of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number
of FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
The system sensitivity setting is kept in the
memory when the engine is turned off.
System Limited Operation Warning
If a dedicated message is displayed, a condition
limiting the system operation may have occurred.
The possible reasons of this limitation are
something is blocking the camera view or a fault.
If an obstruction is signaled, clean the area of the
radar on the front fascia/bumper, and the
camera area on the windshield.
If a fault in the system is occurring, it will still be
possible to drive the vehicle normally, but
automatic braking will not be available in the
event of an impending collision.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, this will go back to normal and
complete operation. Should the fault persist,
contact an authorized dealer.
System Failure Signaling
If the system turns off and a dedicated message
is shown on the display, it means that there is a
fault with the system.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle,
but you are advised to contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Radar Indication Not Available
If conditions are such that the radar cannot
detect obstacles correctly, the system is
deactivated and a dedicated message appears
on the display. This generally occurs in the event
of poor visibility, such as when it is snowing or
raining heavily.
The function of this system can also be
temporarily reduced due to obstructions such as
mud, dirt or ice on the fascia/bumper. In such
cases, a dedicated message will be shown on the
display and the system will be deactivated. This
message can sometimes appear in conditions of
high reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or
ice or snow). When the conditions limiting the
system functions end, it will go back to normal
and complete operation.
In certain cases, this dedicated message could
be displayed when the radar is not detecting any
vehicles or objects within its view range.
If atmospheric conditions are not the reason
behind this message, check if the sensor is dirty.
It could be necessary to clean or remove any
obstructions in the area.
If the message appears frequently, even in the
absence of atmospheric conditions such as snow,
rain, mud or other obstructions, contact an
authorized dealer for a sensor alignment check.
In the absence of visible obstructions, manually
removing the decorative cover trim and cleaning
the radar surface could be required. Have this
operation performed at an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not install devices,
accessories or aerodynamic attachments in front
of the sensor or darken it in any way, as this can
compromise the correct functioning of the
system.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
SAFETY
148
Frontal Collision Alarm With Active Braking — If
Equipped
If this function is selected, the brakes are
operated to reduce the speed of the vehicle in the
event of potential frontal impact.
This function applies an additional braking
pressure if the braking pressure applied by the
driver does not suffice to prevent potential frontal
impact.
The function is active with speed above 2 mph
(4 km/h).
NOTE:
When using an automatic car wash it is recom-
mended to deactivate the system through the
settings of the radio system. The system may
detect the presence of a car, a wall or another
obstacle and activate.
Driving In Special Conditions
In certain driving conditions, system intervention
might be unexpected or delayed. The driver must
therefore be very careful, keeping control of the
vehicle to drive in complete safety.
Driving close to a bend.
The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout.
Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not
aligned in the driving lane.
Lane change by other vehicles.
Vehicles traveling at right angles to the vehicle.
NOTE:
In particularly complex traffic conditions, the
driver can deactivate the system manually
through the Information and Entertainment
system.
If the driver presses the brake pedal fully or
makes an excessive steering maneuver during
system operation, the automatic braking
function may deactivate (e.g. to allow a
possible maneuver to avoid the obstacle).
The FCW system is automatically deactivated
when operating in race mode and a warning
message will be displayed on the instrument
cluster.
Driving Close To A Bend
When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system
may detect a vehicle in front of you, but not
driving in the same driving lane. In cases such as
these, the system may intervene.
Driving Around Wide Curves
The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout
On a roundabout, the system could intervene
when it detects a vehicle ahead that is leaving the
roundabout.
Driving In Roundabouts
Vehicles With Small Dimensions And/Or Not
Aligned In The Driving Lane
The system cannot detect vehicles in front of the
vehicle if they are outside the range of the radar
sensor and may not react to small vehicles, such
as bicycles or motorcycles.
Driving Near Small Vehicles
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
149
Lane Change By Other Vehicles
Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the
same lane as your vehicle within the operating
range of the radar sensor, may cause the system
to intervene.
Other Vehicles Changing Lanes
Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To The Vehicle
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle
that is passing at right angles through the radar
sensor’s operating range
Ú
page 247.
Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that sends the
inflation pressure information of each tire to the
control unit, and will signal the driver in the event
of insufficient tire pressure.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
Tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal,
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See
Ú
page 216 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
WARNING!
The system has not been designed to
prevent impacts and cannot detect possible
conditions leading to an accident in advance.
Failure to take into account this warning may
lead to serious or fatal injuries.
The system may activate, assessing the
trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of
reflecting metal objects different from other
vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs,
barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level
crossings, gates, railways, objects near road
constructions sites or higher than the vehicle
(e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the system
may intervene inside multi-story parking lots
or tunnels, or due to a glare on the road
surface. These possible activations are a
consequence of the real driving scenario
coverage by the system and must not be
regarded as faults.
The system has been designed for road use
only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, the
system must be deactivated to avoid
unnecessary warnings. Automatic deacti-
vation is signaled by the dedicated warning
light/symbol switching on in the instrument
panel
Ú
page 70.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
SAFETY
150
The TPMS will signal the driver if pressure falls
below the warning limit for any reason, including
the effects of low temperature and normal loss of
pressure from the tire.
The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient tire
pressure when pressure is equal to or greater
than the prescribed cold inflation level.
Therefore, if insufficient tire pressure is indicated
by the ( ) warning light displaying in the
instrument cluster, increase the inflation
pressure up to the prescribed cold inflation value.
The system will automatically update, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE:
The TPMS cannot indicate sudden tire pressure
drops (e.g. if a tire bursts). In this case, proceed
with caution and avoid abrupt steering.
Operating Example
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C), and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication
If an insufficient pressure value is detected on
one or more tires, the warning light in the
instrument cluster will display alongside the
dedicated messages, the system will highlight the
tire or tires with insufficient pressure graphically,
and an acoustic signal will be emitted.
In this case, stop the vehicle, check the inflation
pressure of each tire, and inflate the necessary
tire or tires to the correct cold inflation pressure
value, shown on the display or in the dedicated
TPMS menu.
TPMS Temporarily Disabled:
TPMS Check Message
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds,
and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, provided that the system
fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Light will turn
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Packed snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
After the punctured tire has been repaired with
the original tire sealant contained in the tire kit,
the previous condition must be restored so that
the warning light is off during normal driving.
TPMS Deactivation
The TPMS can be deactivated by replacing all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel
and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
151
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster. Instead, dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
be displayed, as long as no system fault exists.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire will
cause the tire to overheat, and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an
accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire
Ú
page 247.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-posi-
tioning booster seat in a rear seating position
Ú
page 164.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint
Ú
page 164.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that you
are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see
Ú
page 245 for customer
service contact information.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
SAFETY
152
(Continued)
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away from
home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in
a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the ON/RUN position, a chime will signal
for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light
and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver
should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
153
(Continued)
(Continued)
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle
are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
WARNING!
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the
lap part of your seat belt as low as possible
and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your
body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a
seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an
authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move
too far forward, increasing the possibility of
injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
WARNING!
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder
so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision
if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
SAFETY
154
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into
Seat Belt Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt
if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk
of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack
so that it is comfortable and not resting on
your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be
adjusted in the upward position without pushing
or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down-
ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
155
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the
event of an accident is reduced for the mother
and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat
belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and
away from the neck. Never place the shoulder
belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a
child restraint system
Ú
page 170.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as
the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack
so that it is comfortable and not resting on
your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
SAFETY
156
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Auto-
matic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with the electrical Air
Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be
equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch
is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off.
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
157
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record
the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any
of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light
is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light see
Ú
page 70.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Driver Front Air Bag
Passenger Front Air Bag
Driver Knee Air Bag Location/Knee Bolster
Location
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
SAFETY
158
(Continued)
Passenger Knee Air Bag Location/Knee Bolster
Location
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no
longer be functional. The protective covers
for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
159
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you
in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position
the front occupants for improved interaction with
the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a Supple-
mental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the
instrument panel below the glove compartment.
The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front
seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door.
The SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure occupants if
they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury from
a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Location
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
SAFETY
160
(Continued)
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force
to injure occupants if they are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys
the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset
frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add
an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do
not add roof racks that require permanent
attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they
are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your
protection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side
Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
161
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences
a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt preten-
sioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the
occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns
or those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that
generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have
the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the
seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
SAFETY
162
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC
Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the OFF position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset
the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active,
a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn
the ignition switch from ignition ACC or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument
panel, may both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of
the road, you must follow the system reset
procedure.
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ACC.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
163
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order
to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition OFF.
12. Turn ignition ACC. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one
minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
SAFETY
164
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seats rather than
in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always
check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make
sure you have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
165
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant
carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the
rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
SAFETY
166
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with
a harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s
squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose
in a collision. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In
a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
167
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and
one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage
to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
SAFETY
168
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint
Ú
page 35.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
169
(Continued)
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
Each anchorage is under a cover with
the anchorage symbol on it. Lift the cover to
access the lower anchorage.
LATCH Anchorage Locations
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the
strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below.
See
Ú
page 170 to check what type of seat belt
each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rear-
ward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it
to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar
2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations
3 — Tether Strap Anchorages
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This
position is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You must
use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 169 for typical installation
instructions.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
SAFETY
170
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú
page 172 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are
not being used by other occupants or being used
to secure child restraints. An unused belt could
injure a child if they play with it and accidentally
lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt
interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint,
route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat
belts are not toys and that they should not play
with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description on
Ú
page 155 for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
171
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of
the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor.
Then, allow the webbing to retract back into
the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull out
any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked,
repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. See
Ú
page 35 for further
information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
SAFETY
172
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú
page 172 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise
the head restraint, and where possible, route
the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Center Tether Special Instructions
Center Tether Attachment:
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located on the back of the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchor-
age. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-fac-
ing car seat to the tether anchorage that is
approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the sec-
tion “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
3 — Tether Strap Anchorages
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks
as you remove slack in the strap.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
173
(Continued)
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection &
Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú
page 79.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified
Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check,
this light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on
while driving, have an authorized dealer service
the vehicle immediately
Ú
page 151.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with
the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
SAFETY
174
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully press the
accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove
the floor mat from the vehicle and place the
floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners
are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully press
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been
properly installed and is secured to your
vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by
lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To avoid
breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
175
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have
a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit
in a parked vehicle with the engine running
for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust
the ventilation system to force fresh, outside
air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?
At times, a problem such as these may interfere
with your driving experience.
The section on emergencies can help you to deal
with critical situations independently.
In an emergency, we recommend that you call the
phone number found in “Helpful Addresses And
Telephone Numbers” under “How To Deal With
Warranty Problems” in the Warranty Book.
You may also consider contacting an authorized
dealer.
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in
the switch bank below the radio screen.
Push the button once to turn the Hazard Warning
Flashers on. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
button a second time to turn the Hazard Warning
Flashers off.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in motion.
Use it only when your vehicle is disabled or
signaling a safety hazard warning for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
cycled to OFF.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System
The PBA system is designed to improve the
vehicle’s braking capacity during emergency
braking
Ú
page 138.
SOS — EMERGENCY CALL
Your vehicle has an on-board assistance feature
that is designed to provide support in case of an
accident and/or emergency. This feature is
automatically activated by air bag intervention, or
can be activated manually by pushing the button
located on the base of the rear view mirror.
NOTE:
SOS - Emergency Call will only work with an
enabled network operator.
SOS - Emergency Call Button
The SOS - Emergency Call system automatically
forwards a call to emergency services in the event
of an accident with air bag intervention providing
that the ignition device is in RUN position and the
air bags are working. When the connection
between the vehicle and a public safety operator
is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
location and vehicle information to the
emergency service operator.
Only a public safety operator can remotely end
the SOS - Emergency Call and, if necessary, call
the vehicle back through the Emergency Call
system. Once the call has ended, you can still call
the emergency service operator to indicate
additional information by pushing the button
again.
CAUTION!
Prolonged use of the Hazard Warning Flashers
may discharge the vehicle’s battery.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
177
To Use SOS - Emergency Call
Push and hold the SOS - Emergency Call button
for a few seconds. The LED, located next to the
SOS button, will blink once and then stay on
indicating a call has been placed.
NOTE:
If the SOS - Emergency Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10 second delay before the call
is placed. The system will issue a verbal alert that
a call is about to be made. To cancel the call
connection, push the SOS - Emergency Call
button again.
Once a connection between the vehicle and an
emergency service operator is made, the SOS -
Emergency Call system will transmit the following
important vehicle information to the operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS -
Emergency Call.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
You will then be able to speak with the emergency
service operator to determine if additional help is
needed.
The SOS - Emergency Call has priority over other
audio sources, which will be muted. If you have a
phone connected via Bluetooth®, it is discon-
nected and reconnected at the end of the SOS -
Emergency Call. Voice prompts will guide you
during the SOS - Emergency Call. If a connection
is made between an emergency service operator
and your vehicle, emergency service operators
may record conversations and sounds within your
vehicle once a connection is made, and by using
the service you consent to having this information
shared.
NOTE:
If you have not subscribed to the SOS service or if
the service is not available or has expired, the
Connect system will display a dedicated screen
when the button is pressed informing you to
contact the national emergency number 9-1-1
(the respective graphic button will be displayed to
make the call if you have connected your mobile
phone via Bluetooth® The call to the national
emergency number 9-1-1 will be made via the
mobile phone by pressing red graphic button
shown on the Connect system display.
SOS Screen Message
SOS - Emergency Call System Limitations
When the ignition switches to the RUN position,
the Emergency Call system runs a routine check.
During this check, a red indicator will illuminate
for about three seconds. This signal must not be
confused with a fault warning. In the event of a
malfunction, the red indicator would remain on. If
the SOS - Emergency Call system detects a
malfunction, any of the following may occur at the
time the malfunction is detected:
NOTE:
The SOS Call function may not be available for the
first minute after the vehicle is started.
The LED next to the SOS button will be contin-
uously illuminated red.
The Emergency Call system is powered by its
own non-rechargeable battery to ensure
operation, even when the vehicle battery is
discharged or disconnected. When system
battery is discharged, the instrument cluster
display will show a special message, different
than other messages referring to other types of
faults. In this case, the system works only if
powered by the vehicle’s battery.
The instrument cluster will display a message
alerting you to contact the Service Network
along with a failure warning light.
Even if the SOS - Emergency Call system is fully
functional, external or uncontrolled factors may
prevent or stop SOS - Emergency Call operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS - Emergency Call system software
and/or hardware is damaged during a vehicle
collision.
There are network problems that could limit or
impair service operation (e.g., error by
operator, busy network, bad weather, etc.).
If the vehicle battery connection fails due to a
collision or accident, the system can support an
SOS - Emergency Call for a limited period of time.
If the battery is disconnected for service, the
system turns off. In this case, it will be possible to
make an SOS - Emergency Call only when the
battery is reconnected to the vehicle’s electrical
system.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
178
(Continued)
(Continued)
System Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable 3G network
connection.
Vehicle must be powered with a properly
functioning electrical system.
The ignition must be in the RUN or ACC
position.
Frequently Asked Questions:
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS -
Emergency Call Button? You have 10 seconds
after pushing the emergency button to cancel the
call. To cancel the call, push the button again.
What type of information is sent when I make an
SOS - Emergency Call from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as the VIN, is
transmitted along with last known GPS location.
Also note that emergency service operators may
record conversations and sounds within your
vehicle once a connection is made, and by using
the service you consent to having this information
shared.
When can I use the SOS - Emergency
Call button? You can ONLY use the
SOS - Emergency Call button to make a
call if you or someone else needs
emergency assistance.
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
3G and GPS aerials. You could prevent 3G
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
An operable 3G network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS-
Emergency Call system to function properly.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system.
This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the
SOS-Emergency Call system to fail, never
add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to
your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
AND SYSTEM LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT) THE SOS FEATURES, APPS
AND SERVICES AMONG OTHERS WILL NOT
OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the air bag warning light in the
instrument cluster if a malfunction in any
part of the air bag system is detected. If the
air bag warning light is illuminated, the air
bag system may not be working properly and
the SOS-Emergency Call system may not be
able to send a signal to an emergency
service operator. If the air bag warning light
is illuminated, contact the Service Network
to have the air bag system checked
immediately.
Ignoring the LED on the SOS-Emergency Call
button could mean you will not have
emergency call services if needed. If the LED
on SOS-Emergency Call button is illuminated
red, contact the Service Network to have the
emergency call system checked
immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an emergency service operator.
All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result
in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
179
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
This vehicle can be equipped with a Tire Service
Kit
Ú
page 181.
As an alternative to the Tire Service Kit, the
vehicle may be purchased with a compact spare
tire
Ú
page 179.
JACK INFORMATION AND USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
Jack Information
The jack weighs 4.4 lb (2 kg).
The jack requires no adjustment.
The jack cannot be repaired, and in the event
of a fault it must be replaced by another factory
replacement.
No tool other than its extension lever may be
fitted on the jack.
Jack Maintenance
Prevent any dirt from depositing on the "worm
screw".
Keep the "worm screw" lubricated.
Never modify the jack.
Conditions Of Non-Use Of The Jack
Temperatures below −40°F (−40°C).
On sandy or muddy ground.
On uneven ground.
On steep slopes in extreme weather
conditions.
In direct contact with the engine or for repairs
under the vehicle.
On boats.
CHANGING PROCEDURE
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the left rear tire,
block the right front wheel.
Wheel Blocking Example
7. Open the liftgate and lift up the load floor
using the handle.
8. Take the warning triangle and position it at a
suitable distance from the vehicle to warn
oncoming vehicles.
9. Unscrew the locking plate and take out the
compact spare tire and the air compressor.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
10. Remove the damaged wheel by using the
wheel wrench to loosen the bolts by one turn.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
1 — Locking Plate
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
180
11. Position the jack under the vehicle, near the
wheel to be changed, taking care not to
damage the plastic body panel.
12. Lift the extension lever on the wrench.
Jacking Location
13. Rotate the extension lever clockwise until the
round pin on the jack engages in the hole in
the lifting block located about 6 inches
(15 cm) from the outside edge of the body.
The lifting points are marked by triangles
visible on the plastic body panel.
Jacking Point Indicators
14. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
15. Remove the five wheel bolts and take the
wheel off.
16. Make sure the contact surfaces between
compact spare tire and hub are clean so that
the fastening bolts will not come loose.
17. Fit the compact spare tire by inserting the
first wheel bolt for two threads into the hole
closest to the valve.
18. Take the wheel wrench and tighten the wheel
bolts.
19. Inflate the compact spare tire by removing
the cap from its inflation valve and screwing
on the compressor inflation hose fitting.
2 — Extension Lever
3 — Wrench Head
4 — Jack
5 — Lifting Block
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
181
20. Make sure that the switch on the compressor
is in the O (off) position, open the liftgate and
insert the plug into the power socket in the
cargo area, or on the center console and start
the engine. Place the on/off switch in the I
(on) position.
Attaching Compressor To Tire
21. Inflate the compact spare tire to a pressure of
43.5 psi (3 bar).
NOTE:
If spare tire is overinflated, be sure to lower the
psi in the tire to the recommended amount by
using the deflation button on the air compressor.
22. Operate the wheel wrench on the jack to
lower the vehicle.
23. Remove the jack.
24. Use the wheel wrench to fully tighten the
bolts, passing alternately from one bolt to the
diagonally opposite one.
To obtain a more accurate reading, it is advisable
to check the pressure of the compact spare tire
on the pressure gauge with the compressor off.
NOTE:
Do not stow the deflated tire in the compact spare
tire location.
The compressor was designed for inflating the
compact spare tire. Do not use it for inflating
mattresses, rafts, etc.
NOTE:
Spare tires are intended for temporary use only.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as
soon as possible.
TIRE SERVICE KIT —
IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
If a tire is punctured, you can make an emergency
repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear
storage area under the load platform.
1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can
repair the tire safely. You should be as far as
possible from the side of the road, and in a
position that is not dangerous for oncoming
traffic. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers,
remove the safety triangle from the luggage
compartment, and place it at a suitable
distance from the vehicle to make other
drivers aware of your presence.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the tire repair kit
hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the
tire service kit flat on the ground.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK (P).
4. Apply the electric park brake and turn the
engine OFF.
6 — Air Compressor
7 — Pressure Gauge
8 — Power Button
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
182
(Continued)
(Continued)
To access the Tire Service Kit, open the liftgate
and lift the load floor.
Load Floor
The Tire Service Kit consists of:
Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid
Filler Tube
Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge
and connectors
Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph
(80 km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily
visible to the driver (e.g. on the dashboard)
after repairing the tire
An instruction pamphlet for reference in
prompt and correct use of the Tire Service Kit,
which must be then given to the personnel
dealing with the sealant-treated tire
A pair of protective gloves
Some adapters, for inflating different
elements
Tire Service Kit Components
NOTE:
The sealing fluid is effective with external
temperatures of between -40°F (-40°C) and
122°F (50°C).
The sealing fluid has an expiration date.
INFLATION PROCEDURE
1 — Sealant Cartridge
2 — Filling Hose
3 — Adhesive Label
4 — Air Compressor
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approx-
imately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat sources.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through
the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory
irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
WARNING!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
183
To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
2. Connect the hose to the sealant cartridge
containing the sealing liquid. Unscrew the tire
valve cap, take out the filler tube and tighten
the fitting on the tire valve.
Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire
3. Make sure the power switch of the
compressor is in the O (off) position.
4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in the
center console, then start the engine.
Inserting Plug Into Outlet
5. Start the compressor by placing the power
switch in the I (on) position.
Air Compressor
6. Inflate the tire to a pressure of at least 32 psi
(2.2 bar)
Ú
page 216. In order to obtain a
more precise reading, check the pressure
value on pressure gauge with the compressor
off.
7. If the pressure is not at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
after 15 minutes, disengage the compressor
from the valve and power outlet. Then, move
the vehicle forwards approximately five tire
turns in order to distribute the sealing fluid
inside the tire evenly, and then repeat the
inflation operation.
8. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km),
stop, engage the electric park brake, and
recheck the tire pressure.
9. If the pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar),
DO NOT drive the vehicle, and see an autho-
rized dealer.
10. If a pressure value of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar)
is detected, restore the correct pressure (with
engine running and electric park brake
engaged), and drive immediately with great
care to an authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
1 — Sealant Cartridge
2 — Filler Hose
4 — Air Compressor
5 — Hose
6 — Sealant Cartridge Connector
WARNING!
7 — Power Switch
8 — Pressure Gauge
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
184
11. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant
bottle where it can be easily seen by the
driver as a reminder that the tire has been
treated with a Tire Service Kit, as well as not
to exceed the speed restriction for the
treated tire.
NOTE:
Only use original sealant cartridges, which can be
purchased at an authorized dealer.
CHECKING AND RESTORING TIRE
P
RESSURE
The compressor can also be used to check and, if
necessary, restore the tire pressure.
Proceed as follows:
1. Make sure that the power switch is in the O
(off) position.
2. Connect the hose directly to the valve on the
tire to be inflated.
3. Insert the plug into the socket in the
passenger compartment or in the cargo area
and start the engine.
4. Start the compressor by putting the power
switch to I (on). As soon as the correct pres-
sure is reached, put the power switch to O
(off).
Air Compressor And Components
If the tire is overinflated, reduce the pressure by
pushing the PSI/BAR button and releasing it
when the correct pressure is reached.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started from the remote battery
connections by using a set of jumper cables and
a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can
be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions
and precautions.
REMOTE BATTERY CONNECTION POSTS
Your vehicle is equipped with remote battery
connection posts for jump starting. Depending on
the vehicle model, remote post locations may
vary.
WARNING!
Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to
the padded area on the steering wheel.
Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the
padded area on the steering wheel is
dangerous because the air bag may not
operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious
injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to
areas where warning lights or the
speedometer cannot be viewed.
5 — Hose
7 — Power Switch
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — PSI/BAR Button
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use the battery for jump starting the
vehicle. Improperly connecting the jumper
cables or booster pack to the battery can
result in electrical system and fuse failure.
Always use the remote battery connection
posts to jump start your vehicle.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
185
Non Quadrifoglio Model
The remote jump starting battery posts can be
found inside the engine compartment.
Remote Battery Post Locations
The remote positive (+) post is located above the
engine stabilizer bar, which can be accessed by
opening the spring loaded protective red flap.
Remote Positive (+) Protective Flap
Remote Positive (+) Post
The remote negative (-) post is an exposed stud,
positioned next to the passenger side hood lock
on the upper frame rail.
Remote Negative (-) Post Location
To carry out the operation, you need to have the
correct cables to connect to the battery of
another vehicle or a portable battery booster
pack to the remote posts of the discharged
battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at
the ends and are identified by different sheath
colors (red = positive, black = negative).
Quadrifoglio Model
Remote Battery Post Locations
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in serious
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
186
The remote positive (+) post is located next to the
passenger side hood lock on the inside of the
upper frame rail, and can be accessed by
removing the protective red flap.
Remote Positive (+) Protective Flap
Remote Positive (+) Post Location
The remote negative (-) post is an exposed stud,
positioned next to the passenger side hood lock
on the upper frame rail.
Remote Negative (-) Post Location
To carry out the operation, you need to have the
correct cables to connect to the battery of
another vehicle or a portable battery booster
pack to the remote posts of the discharged
battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at
the ends and are identified by different sheath
colors (red = positive, black = negative).
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Preparation For Jump Starting:
1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle the
ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off all electrical features in the vehicle.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the park brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in serious
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result
in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
187
Cable Connection
Proceed as follows to perform a jump starting
procedure:
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a
portable battery booster pack, before starting
the vehicle, wait a few seconds after
completing the connection.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
nection procedure.
Cable Disconnection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery, and reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
BUMP STARTING
Never jump start the engine by pushing, towing or
coasting downhill.
NOTE:
You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission by pushing it.
ENGINE OVERHEATING
If your vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced at an authorized dealer.
Engine overheating may occur in situations such
as (but not limited to) extreme environmental
temperatures or frequent engine stops/starts. If
the engine becomes overheated, the Engine
Temperature Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate along with a dedicated
message
Ú
page 75.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in serious
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
188
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the cooling fan does not operate while the
engine is running, the engine temperature will
increase. Stop the engine and contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the cooling system
inspected. The engine could be seriously
damaged unless repairs are made. Contact an
authorized dealer.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
See an authorized dealer to disengage the
manual park release lever.
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Anti-Lift Protec-
tion system, you will need to disable the system
prior to towing by pushing the button located on
the overhead console
Ú
page 24.
The operators of the assistance vehicle must be
informed with regard to the vehicle's minimum
height from ground in order to avoid contact
between the ends of the bumpers with the
equipment of the breakdown truck.
The following image illustrates the front and rear
attachment corners of the vehicle, to be taken
into consideration when loading the vehicle on
the commercial towing vehicle.
Front And Rear Loading Angles
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until
the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
A special tool is required to perform this
procedure. Damage to the vehicle or serious
injury or death may occur if the procedure is
performed improperly. Please contact an
authorized dealer to have this procedure
performed.
CAUTION!
The vehicle should be transported with all
four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of
a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towing
with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted.
When towing with only the front (or rear)
wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the
body, it could damage the transmission.
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remain released, while being
towed.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
189
Front And Rear Loading Angles
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four
wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a
commercial towing vehicle.
TOW EYES
If the vehicle has been in an accident or has
broken down, a tow eye is provided in the tools
container located inside the luggage
compartment for vehicle towing. Towing is meant
only for short distances on a paved road surface.
Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:
1. Unhook the cap on the front grille or rear
bumper (if equipped), pushing on the upper
part.
Front Tow Eye Cap
Rear Tow Eye Cap
2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the
luggage compartment and carefully clean the
threaded housing on the vehicle before
using it.
AWD Models
A — Front Loading
Angle
21.7°
B — Rear Loading
Angle
18.3°
AWD
Models
Quadrifo-
glio
Models
A — Front Loading
Angle
21.7° 20.8°
B — Rear Loading
Angle
18.3° 21.0°
Quadrifoglio
Models
A — Front Loading
Angle
20.8°
B — Rear Loading
Angle
21.0°
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing
dolly can cause significant damage to your
vehicle.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
190
3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about
11 turns).
NOTE:
The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix on the
tow eye must not exceed 15°.
Work Angle Of Tow Cable
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú
page 161.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how
a vehicle’s systems performed under certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú
page 164.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The tow eye must be used exclusively for
roadside assistance operations. Only use the
tow eye with an appropriate device in
accordance with the highway code (a rigid
bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short
distance to the nearest service location.
Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles
off the road or where there are obstacles.
In compliance with the above conditions,
towing with a tow eye must take place with
two vehicles (one towing, the other towed)
aligned as much as possible along the same
center line. Damage to your vehicle may
occur if these guidelines are not followed.
When towing, only use a facility that can tow
vehicles with low ground clearances as
extensive damage can result by using a
standard tow truck platform.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
191
Correct servicing permits the performance of the
vehicle to be maintained over time, as well as
limited running costs and safeguarding the
efficiency of the safety systems.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct servicing is crucial for guaranteeing a
long life for the vehicle under the best conditions.
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned a series
of checks and services for your vehicle at fixed
intervals based on distance and time, as
described in the Scheduled Servicing Plan.
Before each service, it is always necessary to
carefully follow the instructions in the Scheduled
Servicing Plan (e.g. periodically check level of
fluids, tire pressure, etc.).
Scheduled Servicing is offered by an authorized
dealer according to a set time schedule. If, during
each operation, in addition to the ones
scheduled, the need arises for further
replacements or repairs, these may be carried
out with the owner’s explicit consent only.
NOTE:
Scheduled Servicing intervals are required by the
manufacturer. Failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
You are advised to inform an authorized dealer of
any small operating irregularities without waiting
for the next service.
PERIODIC CHECKS
Every month or every 620 miles (1,000 km) or
before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:
Engine coolant level.
Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible).
Windshield washer fluid level.
Tire inflation pressure and condition.
Operation of lighting system (headlights,
direction indicators, hazard warning lights,
etc.).
Operation of windshield washing/wiping
system and positioning/wear of wiper blades.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Oil consumption of the engine depends on
conditions and driving style. For this reason, the
engine oil level must be checked every
1,860 miles (3,000 km), and top off if necessary;
for further information
Ú
page 197.
HEAVY USAGE OF THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle is used under one of the following
conditions:
Dusty roads.
Short, repeated journeys less than 4 miles
(7 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.
Engine often idling or driving long distances at
low speeds or long periods of inactivity.
In the event of a long period of inactivity.
The following checks must be carried out more
often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing
Plan:
Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.
Visually inspect conditions of: engine,
transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel
system/brakes) and rubber elements
(sleeves/bushes, etc.).
Check battery charge and battery fluid level
(electrolyte).
Visually inspect conditions of the accessory
drive belts.
Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and
replace oil filter.
Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air
filter.
Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if
the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road
environment or is operated predominately at idle
or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle
use is considered Severe Duty.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192
MAINTENANCE PLAN — 2.0L ENGINE
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.
1
SOS backup battery replacement. (if equipped).
2
● ● ●
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary. Check the tire service kit recharge condition and
expiration date.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger
compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel
warning lights, etc.).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.
3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool)
and engine oil degradation (if equipped).
4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),
rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system
and adjust nozzles, if necessary.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake
pads and operation of pad wear indicators.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
193
(o) Recommended operations
(●) Mandatory operations
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the
accessory drive belt(s).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change engine coolant.
●
Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only). ●
Replace accessory drive belt(s). ●
Replace air cleaner cartridge.
5
● ● ● ● ●
Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change the brake fluid.
6
Replace the passenger compartment cleaner.
5
o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o
Spark plug replacement.
7
1. The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the
instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles (16,000 km).
2. The SOS backup battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.
3. Top up using the fluids indicated, only after checking that the system is intact
Ú
page 242.
4. If oil degradation ratio (data collectible from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%), engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.
5. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner filter must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
6. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, regardless of the mileage.
7. The spark plug change interval is 60,000 miles for NAFTA market or 60,000 km outside NAFTA. Yearly intervals do not apply.
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could
cause an accident.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
194
MAINTENANCE PLAN — 2.9L ENGINE
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
SOS backup battery replacement (if equipped).
1
● ● ●
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and
expiration date.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger
compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel
warning lights, etc.).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.
2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),
rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system
and adjust nozzles, if necessary.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake
pads and operation of pad wear indicators.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
195
Brake pads/brake discs replacement.
3
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the
accessory drive belt(s).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change engine coolant.
●
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only).
●
Replace accessory drive belt/s.
4
Replace air cleaner cartridge.
5
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change the brake fluid.
6
Replace the cabin air filter.
5
o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o
Spark plug replacement.
7
● ● ● ● ●
1. The SOS backup battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.
2. Top off using the fluids indicated only after checking that the system is intact
Ú
page 242.
3. The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message
on the instrument panel. After each discs replacement, reset the warning light using the diagnostic socket.
4. Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/
or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt
must be replaced every 2 years.
5. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner filter must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
6. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, regardless of the mileage.
7. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
196
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CHECKING LEVELS — 2.0L ENGINE
1 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Engine Oil Filler Cap
3 – Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
197
CHECKING LEVELS — 2.9L ENGINE
ENGINE OIL
The engine oil level can be seen on the
instrument cluster display every time the engine
is started, or on the Information and
Entertainment system display by activating on the
main menu (MENU button) the following
functions in sequence:
1. “Vehicle Information”
2. “Engine Oil”
Check that the oil level is between the MIN and
MAX level on the instrument cluster display using
the 6 notches shown. 1 notch displays the MIN
level and 6 notches displays the MAX level.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, windshield washer fluid, antifreeze
etc. to minimize spillage onto top of engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed air
or absorbent cloth.
If the oil level is close to or below the MIN mark,
add oil gradually through the filler, (refer to
“Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On
Display” in this section) considering that each
notch shown on the display corresponds to
approximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml).
The oil level can also be checked manually on
2.9L Quadrifoglio models.
1 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 5 – Engine Oil Dipstick
3 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 – Engine Oil Filler
CAUTION!
Make sure not to add too much oil when
topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess
may damage the engine. Have the vehicle
checked. Never exceed the MAX level when
topping off engine oil. It is advisable to check
the oil level in intermediate steps using the oil
dipstick (2.9L Quadrifoglio Only).
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
198
NOTE:
Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper
torque whenever it is removed to add oil to
engine. Never run the engine with cap removed
as this could cause oil to leak from engine.
Manual Oil Level Checking Procedure —
2.9L Quadrifoglio
Check that the oil level is between the MIN and
MAX marks on dipstick, clean it with a lint-free
cloth and reinsert it. Extract the dipstick again
and check that the level is between the MIN and
MAX marks.
Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On
Display — 2.9L Quadrifoglio
If an engine oil top-off is needed, in order to
ensure the correct indication of the oil level on
the display, proceed with the following process:
Leave the car on flat ground with the engine
running for approximately five minutes
(temperature higher than 198°F (90°C) and
shut the engine off.
Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition to the
ACC mode without starting the engine and wait
for a few seconds.
NOTE:
If the level indication is not updated after the
previously described procedure, repeat the
engine adjustment, shut the engine off and wait
another five minutes before starting it again. If
the indication is not updated after the second
start, contact an authorized dealer.
Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On
Display — 2.0L
If an engine oil top-off is needed, in order to
ensure the correct indication of the oil level on
the display, proceed with the following process:
Leave the car on flat ground with the engine
running for approximately five minutes
(temperature higher than 176°F (80°C) and
shut the engine off.
Start the engine again and idle it for about two
minutes.
NOTE:
If you have added the specified amount of oil and
the indicator is not reading “Full”, please contact
an authorized dealer.
ENGINE COOLANT FLUID
If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of the
reservoir and add the fluid described
Ú
page 242.
WASHER FLUID FOR WINDSHIELD/
H
EADLIGHTS
The windshield and headlight (if equipped)
washer fluid reservoir is equipped with a
telescopic filler neck.
If the level is too low, remove reservoir cap and lift
the filler neck. Then, add the fluid described
Ú
page 242. After filling the reservoir, lower the
filler neck and install the reservoir cap until you
hear it click.
CAUTION!
The oil level is not refreshed immediately on
the display after topping off. Consequently,
wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the
display and follow the procedure below.
WARNING!
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the
engine to cool down before loosening the filler
cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminum
cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!
CAUTION!
The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.
If the MAX mark is exceeded (last notch on the
right turns red) after the fill-up, go to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the oil in excess removed.
Do not add oil with specifications different
from those of the oil already in the engine.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain
substances which are harmful to the
environment. To change the oil and filters, we
advise you to contact an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
199
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, windshield washer fluid, antifreeze
etc. to minimize spillage onto top of engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed air
or absorbent cloth.
NOTE:
The headlight washers are activated every
10 activations of the windshield washer.
NOTE:
The headlight washing system will not work if the
liquid level is low (situation indicated by the
symbol on the instrument cluster display
Ú
page 66). The windshield washer will keep
working.
On vehicles equipped with headlight washers,
there is a reference notch on the dipstick: ONLY
the windshield/rear window washer operates
with the level below this reference.
BRAKE FLUID
Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. If the
fluid level in the tank is low, contact an authorized
dealer to have the system checked.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ACTIVATION
S
YSTEM OIL
The transmission control oil level should only be
checked at an authorized dealer.
USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE LIFE
O
F YOUR BATTERY
To avoid draining your battery and make it last
longer, observe the following instructions:
When you park the vehicle, ensure that the
doors and liftgate are closed properly to
prevent any lights from remaining on inside the
passenger's compartment.
Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazard
warning lights, etc.) switched on for a long time
when the engine is not running.
Before performing any operation on the
electrical system, disconnect the negative
battery cable.
If you wish to install electrical accessories after
purchasing the vehicle that require permanent
electrical supply (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories
which influence the electrical supply
requirements, contact an authorized dealer,
who’s qualified staff will evaluate the overall
electrical consumption.
NOTE:
After the battery is disconnected, the steering
must be initialized. The Power Steering
Warning Light on the instrument cluster display
switches on to indicate this. To carry out this
procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the
way from one end to the other, and then turn it
back to the central position.
BATTERY
The battery does not require the electrolyte to be
topped up with distilled water. A periodic check
carried out at an authorized dealer, however, is
necessary to check efficiency.
CAUTION!
If the charge level remains under 50% for a
long time, the battery may be damaged by
sulfation, reducing its capacity and efficiency
during the vehicle start. The battery is also
more prone to the risk of freezing (at
temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).
WARNING!
Battery acid is a corrosive solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery
acid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing.
Do not lean over a battery when attaching
clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin,
flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú
page 184.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the battery.
Do not use a booster battery or any other
booster source with an output greater than
12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch
each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
200
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
BATTERY RECHARGING
IMPORTANT NOTES
NOTE:
Before using the charging device, always make
sure that it is appropriate for the installed
battery, with constant voltage (below 14.8 Volts)
and low amperage (maximum 15 Amps).
Recharge the battery in a well ventilated
environment.
Before using any devices to charge or to
maintain the charge of the battery, carefully
follow the instructions provided with the device
in order to properly and safely connect it to the
vehicle battery.
You can recharge the battery without discon-
necting the wires of the vehicle's electrical
system.
To reach the battery, remove the load floor
inside the liftgate.
Load Floor
Locate the battery access panel under the load
floor.
Battery Access Panel
Remove the protective cover and connect the
positive cable terminal of the charger (usually
red) to the positive terminal (+) of the battery.
Connect the negative terminal of the charger
(usually black) to nut next to the negative
terminal (-) of the battery.
Battery
The vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS), which is able to measure the charge
and discharge voltage, calculate the charge level
and the general condition of the battery. The
sensor is placed next to the negative terminal (-)
of the battery.
For a correct charge/discharge procedure, the
charge voltage must go through the IBS sensor.
1. Turn the charger on and follow the instruc-
tions in the user's manual to completely
recharge the battery.
2. When the battery is charged, turn the charger
off before disconnecting it from the battery.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it
may explode because of the nitrogen
trapped inside the ice crystals.
At all times while charging or recharging the
battery, make sure that any sparks or open
flames are kept sufficiently far away from the
battery.
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Negative Post (Nut)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
201
3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of the
battery charger and then the red cable
terminal.
4. Refit the protective cover of the positive
terminal of the battery and the access cover
to the battery compartment.
NOTE:
If a "quick-type" battery charger is used with the
battery fitted on the vehicle, before connecting it
disconnect both cables of the battery itself. Do
not use a "quick-type" battery charger to provide
the starting voltage.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
The following pages contain instructions on the
required maintenance from the technical
personnel who designed the vehicle.
In addition to these specific maintenance
instructions specified for routine scheduled
servicing, there are other components which may
require periodic maintenance or replacement
over the vehicle’s life cycle.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Level Check
To ensure correct engine lubrication, the oil must
always be kept at the prescribed level
Ú
page 196.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, for
example every 1,864 miles (3,000 km).
It must be checked about five minutes after
stopping the engine.
Full operating temperature must be reached. The
vehicle must also be parked on as level a surface
as possible.
The engine oil level can be checked using the
Information and Entertainment system. To
access the function, activate the main menu
(MENU button) and select the following options in
sequence:
1. “Vehicle Information”
2. “Engine Oil”
Ensure that the oil level is within the interval on
the dipstick between the minimum and maximum
limits (Quadrifoglio only).
Changing The Engine Oil
For the correct servicing intervals
Ú
page 192.
Choice Of Engine Oil Type
To ensure optimal performance and maximum
protection in all operating conditions, it is advised
to use certified engine oils
Ú
page 242.
Additives For Engine Oil
It is strongly recommended not to use additives
(other than leak detection dyes) with the engine
oil.
The engine oil is a product designed especially for
the vehicle, and its performance may be deteri-
orated through the use of further additives.
Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters
For the disposal of the engine oil and filters,
contact the appropriate body to determine local
regulations.
NOTE:
Incorrectly disposed used engine oil may seri-
ously harm the environment.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
Replacing the Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter must be replaced each time
the engine oil is changed. It is advised to replace
it with a genuine spare part, specifically designed
for this vehicle.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
For the correct servicing intervals
Ú
page 192. It
is advised to replace the engine air cleaner filter
with a genuine spare part, specifically designed
for this vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
M
AINTENANCE
To ensure the best possible performance, the air
conditioning system must be checked and
undergo maintenance at an authorized dealer at
the beginning of the summer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemicals to clean the air
conditioning system, since the internal
components may be damaged. This kind of
damage is not covered by warranty.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
202
Replace The Cabin Air Filter
For the correct servicing intervals
Ú
page 192.
For cleaner replacement, contact an authorized
dealer.
LUBRICATING MOVING PARTS OF THE
B
ODYWORK
Ensure that the locks and bodywork junction
points, including components such as the seat
guides, door hinges (and rollers), liftgate and
hood are periodically lubricated with
lithium-based grease to ensure correct, silent
operation and to protect them from rust and
wear.
Thoroughly clean the components, eliminating
every trace of dirt and dust. After lubricating,
eliminate excess oil and grease. Also pay
particular attention to the hood closing devices,
to ensure correct operation. Operations of the
hood are to be carried out with the engine cold.
Remember to check, clean and lubricate the
locking, release and safety devices.
Lubricate the external lock barrels twice a year.
Apply a small amount of high-quality lubricant
directly into the lock barrel.
If necessary, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
WINDSHIELD WIPER
Periodically clean the windshield, rear window
and rubber profile of the windshield wiper blades,
using a sponge or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive
detergent. This eliminates the salt or impurities
accumulated when driving.
Prolonged operation of the windshield window
wipers with dry glass may cause the deterioration
of the blades, in addition to abrasion of the
surface of the glass. To eliminate the impurities
on the dry glass, always operate the windshield
washers.
In the event of very low outdoor temperatures,
below 0°F (-17.8°C), ensure that the movement
of the rubber part in contact with the glass is not
obstructed. Use a suitable deicing product to
release it if required.
Avoid using the windshield wipers to remove frost
or ice.
Also avoid contact of the rubber profile of the
blades with petroleum derivatives such as engine
oil, gas, etc.
NOTE:
The life of the windshield wiper blades varies
according to the usage frequency. It is advised to
replace the blades approximately once a year.
When the blades are worn, noise, marks on the
glass or streaks of water may be noticed. In the
presence of these conditions, clean the wind-
shield wiper blades or, if necessary, replace
them.
Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades
(“Service Position” Function)
The “service position” function allows the driver
to replace the windshield wiper blades easily. It is
also recommended to activate this function when
it is snowing and to make it easier to remove any
dirt deposits in the area where the blades are
normally positioned, while washing.
NOTE:
If the windshield wipers are raised while not in
the “service position,” it is possible to damage
the hood.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some
unapproved refrigerants are flammable and
can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your
owner’s information kit, for further warranty
information.
WARNING!
Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is a
serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in
bad weather conditions.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
203
Activation Of The Function
To activate this function, disable the windshield
wiper before placing the ignition in the OFF
position.
This function can only be activated within two
minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF
position.
To activate this function, move the lever upward
for at least three seconds.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
Function Deactivation
The function is deactivated if:
More than two minutes has passed before
placing the ignition in the OFF position after
raising the lever and placing the wipers in
service position.
The ignition is placed in the ACC position and
the windshield wiper control is used.
If, after using the function, the ignition is set back
to ACC with the blades in a position other than
rest position (at the base of the windshield), they
will only return to rest position following a
command given using the stalk (stalk upwards,
into unstable position) or when a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) is exceeded.
Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades
Proceed as follows:
1. Raise the wiper arm, push tab of the attach-
ment spring and remove the blade from the
arm.
Wiper Release Tab
2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in the
dedicated housing in the arm and checking
that it is locked.
3. Lower the wiper arm onto the windshield.
NOTE:
Do not operate the windshield wiper with the
blades lifted from the windshield.
Front/Rear Windshield Washers
The window washer nozzles are fixed. If there is
no jet of fluid, first check that there is fluid in the
reservoir
Ú
page 196.
Front Windshield Washers
Rear Windshield Washer
Then, check that the nozzle holes are not clogged;
use a needle to unblock them if necessary.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
204
(Continued)
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Adequate maintenance of the engine exhaust
system represents the best protection against
leaks of carbon monoxide into the passenger
compartment.
If an unusual noise from the exhaust or the
presence of smoke in the passenger
compartment is identified, or if the underbody or
rear section of the vehicle have been damaged,
have the entire exhaust system and adjoining
bodywork areas checked at an authorized dealer
to identify any components which are broken,
damaged, worn or have moved from their correct
fitting position.
Open welding or loose connections may permit
exhaust gas to enter the passenger
compartment.
Have the exhaust system checked every time the
vehicle is raised. Replace the components where
necessary (for these operations, contact an
authorized dealer).
In normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter does not require maintenance. To
ensure that it operates correctly, and prevent it
from getting damaged, it is extremely important
that the engine operates perfectly.
To minimize the risk of damaging the catalytic
converter, proceed as follows:
Do not stop the engine or deactivate the
ignition with gear engaged and vehicle in
motion.
Do not attempt to start the engine by bump
starting.
Do not use the vehicle if irregular idling or
operating conditions are experienced.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Check
Your vehicle has two cooling systems and both
need to be checked to ensure they are at proper
fill levels
Ú
page 196.
Check the engine coolant and intercooler coolant
level every oil change or before long trips.
If there are impurities in the engine coolant, the
system must be drained, flushed and refilled:
contact an authorized dealer.
Check the front part of the condenser for any
build-up of insects, leaves or other debris. Should
it be dirty, clean by spraying delicately with water.
Check the hoses of the engine/intercooler
cooling system to ensure that the rubber has not
deteriorated and that there are no cracks, tears,
cuts or obstructions in the expansion tank side
and radiator side connectors. Should there be
any doubt regarding leaks from the system (e.g. if
frequent top ups are required), have the seal
checked at an authorized dealer.
With the engine off and at normal operating
temperature, check that the cooling system
radiator cap is closed properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood
is raised. The fan starts automatically and
may start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF position. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON position.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
205
(Continued)
NOTE:
Before removing the coolant reservoir cap, wait
for the system to cool down.
Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The Engine/
Intercooler Coolant
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, have
cleaning and flushing carried out at an authorized
dealer.
For the correct servicing intervals
Ú
page 192.
NOTE:
For topping off, and proper coolant specifi-
cations
Ú
page 242.
Do not use pure water, alcohol-based coolants,
corrosions inhibitors or additional anti-rust
products because they may be incompatible
with the engine coolant and cause the clogging
of the radiator. The use of propylene
glycol-based coolant is also not recommended.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, windshield washer fluid, antifreeze
etc. to minimize spillage onto top of engine.
Any excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of
the engine should be removed using
compressed air or absorbent cloth.
Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap
To prevent loss of engine coolant, make sure that
the expansion tank cap is closed. If it is open,
screw it completely until you reach/hear the click.
Periodically check the cap and clean it from any
foreign bodies that may have deposited on the
external surface.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is subject
to legal requirements. Contact the appropriate
body to determine local regulations.
NOTE:
To prevent the fluid from being ingested by
children or animals, do not keep it in open
containers or pour it on the ground. If ingested,
contact a doctor immediately. Eliminate any
traces of fluid from the ground immediately.
When the vehicle stops after a short trip,
steam may be seen coming out from the front
of the hood. This is a normal phenomenon
which is due to the presence of rain, snow or a
lot of moisture on the surface of the radiator.
With engine and system cold, do not top up
with coolant beyond the maximum level
indicated on the reservoir in the engine
compartment.
BRAKING SYSTEM
In order to guarantee the efficiency of the braking
system, periodically check its components; for
this operation, contact an authorized dealer.
For the correct servicing intervals
Ú
page 192.
NOTE:
Driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal
may compromise its efficiency, increasing the risk
of accidents. When driving, never keep your foot
on the brake pedal and don’t put unnecessary
strain on it to prevent the brakes from over-
heating. Excess pad wear may cause damage to
the braking system.
When an insufficient oil level is detected,
contact an authorized dealer to have the
system checked.
Always keep the cap of the brake fluid reservoir
(in the engine compartment) completely
closed.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never add coolant with the engine hot or
overheated.
Do not attempt to cool an overheated engine
by loosening or removing the cap. The heat
causes a considerable increase in pressure
in the cooling system.
To prevent damage to the engine, only use
the engine cooling circuit caps provided.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid
Ú
page 242. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance.
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle
is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
206
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Use only a transmission oil with the character-
istics indicated
Ú
page 242.
Special Additives
Do not use any type of additive with the
automatic transmission oil. The automatic
transmission oil is a product designed especially
for this vehicle and its performance may be
compromised through the use of further
additives.
Frequency of Oil Changes
In normal vehicle operating conditions, it is not
necessary to change the transmission oil.
REPLACING THE BATTERY
If necessary, replace the battery with another
battery with the same specifications. It is advised
to contact an authorized dealer for replacement.
NOTE:
Each time the 12 Volt battery is reconnected,
cycle the steering wheel all the way to the left.
Then cycle the steering wheel all the way to the
right to allow the steering angle sensor to learn
the steering angle thresholds.
Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for
maintenance.
NOTE:
It will not be possible to open the liftgate with a
key or by pushing the button in the passenger
compartment when the battery is disconnected.
Always position the manual liftgate opening strap
on the liftgate lock before disconnecting the
battery. The procedure is described in the “Lift-
gate Emergency Opening”
Ú
page 59.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
electrical circuit inside of the fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in an open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
207
J-CASE Fuse
Fuse Extracting Pliers
To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked to the
fuse box.
Fuse Box
Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them,
and extract the pliers pulling upwards.
The pliers have two different ends, both of which
are specifically designed to remove the different
types of fuses present in the vehicle:
Fuse Extracting Pliers
After use, return the pliers to their proper position
using the following procedures:
Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert
them into their housing.
Push downward on the pliers into their housing
until they click into place.
Fuse Location
The fuses, which can be replaced by the user, are
grouped in two boxes below the passenger side
foot board and inside the luggage compartment.
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
1 — MINI fuse
2 — J-CASE fuse
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or
vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or
property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
transmission system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
208
Control Unit Under Passenger Side
Footboard
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the
passenger side, pulling to release the two
buttons.
Release Buttons On Footboard
2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove the panel
pulling downward.
Release Hooks On Footboard
The fuses are freely accessible on the control
unit.
After replacing the fuse, make sure that panel
and footboard are correctly locked.
1 — Footboard
2 — Panel
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
209
Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard
Passenger Side Control Unit
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Front power window (driver’s side) F33 25
Front power window (passenger side) F34 25
Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control system, alarm, power door
mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port
F36 15
Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), doors unlock, central lock F38 20
Windshield washer pump F43 20
Rear left power window F47 25
Rear right power window F48 25
Heater rear window coil F94 15
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
210
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.
2. Remove the control unit cover.
Control Unit
The fuses are freely accessible on the control
unit.
The number identifying the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse is shown on the
cover.
After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have
closed the cover correctly.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
211
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
Luggage Compartment Control Unit
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE
Receiver module (TTM/TTEBM) F01 40
Hi-Fi system F08 30
I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger F21 10
KL15/a 12 Volts Power socket in the luggage compartment F22 20
Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F1 20
Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F2 15
Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30) F3 10
Tow bar (+15) F4 10
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
212
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Instructions
Before replacing a bulb, check the contacts for oxidation.
Replace blown bulbs with others of the same type and power.
After replacing a headlight bulb, always check its alignment.
When a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse is intact before changing the bulb.
NOTE:
In some particular climate conditions, such as low temperature, humidity, or after washing the vehicle, a thin condensation layer may form on the internal
surfaces of the front and rear headlights. This condensation will disappear after switching on the headlights.
Types Of Bulbs
The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs
Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.
Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then
extract it.
Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.
Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.
Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
213
Replacement Bulbs
*Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
NOTE:
Only replace bulbs when the engine is off. Also
ensure that the engine is cold, to prevent the risk
of burns.
Front Light Cluster
Direction Indicators
Proceed with the following directions to change
bulbs:
1. Operating inside the engine compartment,
locate the protective cover.
Protective Cover Location
2. Remove protective cover.
Protective Cover
Light bulbs Type Power
Front direction indicators* PY24W 24W
Rear Fog lights * H11 55 W
Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights (DRL)* H15 55/15W
Dipped beam headlights* H7 55W
Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35W
Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1W
Glove compartment light W5W 4W
Liftgate light W5W 5W
Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
214
3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counter-
clockwise, and then slide it off the headlight
body.
Bulb/Connector
4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb
holder.
5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the bulb holder.
6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in the
housing on the headlight body and turn it
clockwise, making sure that it is locked
correctly.
7. Install the protective cover.
Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Xenon Gas
Discharge Headlights
To replace the bulbs of the main beam
headlights, contact an authorized dealer.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Courtesy Mirror Light
To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the lens,
using a suitable tool.
Sun Visor
2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, then insert the new bulb, making
sure that it is correctly fastened between the
contacts.
3. Install the lens, inserting it first on one side
and then pressing on the other side until it
clicks into place.
Glove Compartment Light
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, using a
suitable tool.
Courtesy Lamp Indent
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Lens
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
215
3. Open protective cover and remove the bulb
pulling out of the connector.
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
4. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly
inserted fully.
5. Close the protective cover on the lens.
6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first on one
side and then pressing on the other side until
it clicks into place.
Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights
To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, and remove the liftgate
lamp assembly using a suitable tool.
Ceiling Light Indent
2. Open protective cover and remove the bulb
pulling out of the connector.
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly
inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the lens.
5. Install liftgate lamp in the correct position,
inserting it first on one side, and then
pressing on the other side until it clicks into
place.
Puddle Lights On Door Panel
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and remove the puddle light
assembly, using a suitable tool.
Puddle Light Indent
2. Open protective cover and remove the bulb
pulling out of the connector.
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
216
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly
inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the lens.
5. Install puddle light in the correct position,
inserting it first on one side and then pressing
on the other side until it clicks into place.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identifi-
cation Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to
this standard have the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the section width. The
letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
217
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
218
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle.
If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
219
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
220
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard
Ú
page 126.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú
page 126.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.).
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and
towing capacities of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of
occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
221
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
222
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in
tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
223
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining
correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures
For vehicle speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h),
recommended cold tire inflation pressures are
listed on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard located on driver’s side B-pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
When driving at speeds 100 mph (160 km/h)
and above, increased tire pressures and reduced
vehicle loading are required for high-speed
vehicle operation.
For driving speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h)
recommended cold tire inflation pressures are
listed below under “High Speed Tire Inflation
Pressure”. Vehicle loading condition must not
exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + three
passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) luggage).
2.0L Engine
NOTE:
Using tires of a different size, type, brand or design on the front and rear may adversely affect vehicle drive-ability. We recommend using only tires approved
by the manufacturer. The manufacturer cannot determine if unapproved tires are suitable for use and therefore cannot guarantee vehicle safety in those
conditions.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under max-
imum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You
could have a serious collision.
Tires Wheel
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure
Front Rear Front Rear
235/60 R18 103V 18x8J 30 psi / 210 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 38 psi / 260 kPa
235/55 R19 101V & 105V 19x8J 30 psi / 210 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 38 psi / 260 kPa
255/45 R20 101H 20x8.5J 33 psi / 230 kPa 36 psi / 250 kPa 35 psi / 240 kPa 39 psi / 270 kPa
255/40 R21 102W XL 21x8.5J 33 psi / 230 kPa 36 psi / 250 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 39 psi / 270 kPa
195/75 R18 106P
(Compact Spare Tire)
– 43 psi / 300 kPa
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
224
2.9L Engine
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired
if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A
Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
For more information
Ú
page 149.
Tires Wheel
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure
Front Rear Front Rear
255/45 R20 101Y
(Original Equipment)
20x9J 36 psi / 250 kPa - 39 psi / 270 kPa -
255/40 R21 102Y XL
(Original Equipment)
21x9J 39 psi / 270 kPa - 39 psi / 270 kPa -
285/40 R20 104Y
(Original Equipment)
20x10J - 39 psi / 270 kPa - 42 psi / 290 kPa
285/35 R21 105Y XL
(Original Equipment)
21x10J - 42 psi / 290 kPa - 42 psi / 290 kPa
255/40 R21 M+S
(Snow Tires)
21x9J 39 psi / 270 kPa - 39 psi / 270 kPa -
285/35 R21 M+S
(Snow Tires)
21x9J - 42 psi / 290 kPa - 42 psi / 290 kPa
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a col-
lision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never combine them with other types of tires.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
225
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds contin-
uously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining when
your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch
(1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in
existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú
page 225. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú
page 216.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you
ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,
and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
226
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire
Ú
page 181.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at
any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall
on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss
of vehicle control.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
227
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel. This
label contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals
or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S,
M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall.
Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the limited
use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap
is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap
is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
228
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on
the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some
states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws
should be checked before using these tire types.
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES
It is possible to fit 13 mm chains on the tires:
2.0L engines, 18” and 19” are chainable.
2.9L engines, 20” and 21” are chainable.
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
NOTE:
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Use on rear tires only.
Check the tension of the snow chains after the
first few meters have been driven.
Using snow chains with tires with non-original
dimensions may damage the vehicle.
Using different tires sizes or types (M+S, snow,
etc.) between the front and rear axles may
adversely affect vehicle drivability, with the
risk of losing control of the vehicle and
resulting accidents.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that
only traction devices in good condition are
used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
229
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These
effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, maintain traction
levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
To resolve this problem, tires should be rotated at
each service interval (approximately every
10,000 miles [16,000 km]). More frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If Equipped
Due to different size tires and wheels on front and
rear axles, tire rotation is not possible for:
2.0L Engine equipped with a different front and
rear tire size.
Tire rotation contributes to the preservation of the
grip and traction performance on wet, muddy or
snowy roads, guaranteeing optimal drivability of
the vehicle.
In the case of irregular wear of the tires identify
the cause and correct it as soon as possible, by
contacting an authorized dealer.
The rotational direction of the tire must be taken
into consideration when rotating the tires. The
recommended rotation pattern for directional
tires is shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation
It is recommended to avoid situations with a large
difference in wear between the front and rear
tires and to strictly use Winter tires of the sizes
given on the tire placard.
The AWD system and the original tires are
developed together to ensure the vehicle’s best
performance. When changing the tires, it is
recommended to us the same “AR” marked tires,
to maintain the same level of performance and
component life.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal safety requirements
in addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may occur if different
front and rear tire sizes are rotated
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
230
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by
law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle is left inactive for longer than a
month, the following precautions should be
observed:
Park the vehicle in an area that is covered and
dry, and well-ventilated if possible. Slightly
open the windows.
Check that the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is not
activated.
Carry out the “Liftgate Emergency Opening”
procedure
Ú
page 59.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal and
check the battery charge. Repeat this check
once every three months during storage.
If the battery is not disconnected from the
electrical system, check its state of charge
every 30 days.
Clean and protect the painted parts using
protective wax.
Clean and protect the shiny metal parts using
special compounds available commercially.
Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield
wiper rubber blades, and lift them off the
glass.
Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated
plastic sheet, paying particular care not to
damage the painted surface by dragging any
dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not
use compact plastic sheets, as they do not
allow humidity to evaporate from the surface
of the vehicle.
Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) above the
standard prescribed pressure and check it
periodically.
Do not drain the engine cooling system.
Any time the vehicle is left inactive for two
weeks or more, operate the air conditioning
system with engine idling for at least five
minutes, setting external air and with fan set to
maximum speed. This operation will ensure
appropriate lubrication for the system, thus
minimizing the possibility of damage to the
compressor when the system is operated
again.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to STOP and having
closed the driver side door, wait at least one
minute before disconnecting the electrical supply
from the battery. When reconnecting the elec-
trical supply to the battery, make sure that the
ignition is in the STOP position and the driver’s
side door is closed.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos-
sible tire failure.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
231
BODYWORK
PROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
The vehicle is equipped with the best available
technological solutions to protect the bodywork
against corrosion.
These include:
Painting products and systems which give the
vehicle resistance to corrosion and abrasion.
Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) steel sheets,
with high resistance to corrosion.
Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective
function in the more exposed points: under
door, inner wing, edges, etc.
Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent
condensation and pockets of moisture which
could favor the formation of rust inside.
Use of special films to protect against abrasion
in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).
CORROSION WARRANTY
Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion Warranty
against perforation due to rust of any original
element of the structure or bodywork. For the
general terms of this warranty, refer to the
Warranty Booklet.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Paint
Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to
prevent the formation of rust.
Maintenance of paintwork consists of washing
the vehicle: the frequency depends on the
conditions and environment where the vehicle is
used. For example, it is advisable to wash the
vehicle more often in areas with high levels of
atmospheric pollution or salted roads.
Some parts of the vehicle may be covered with a
matte paint which, in order to be maintained
intact, requires special care.
To correctly wash the vehicle, follow these
instructions:
If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to
wash the vehicle, keep a distance of at least
15 inches (40 cm) from the bodywork to avoid
damage or alteration. Build up of water could
cause damage to the vehicle in the long term.
To make it easier to remove any dirt deposits in
the area where the blades are normally located
it is recommended to position the windshield
wipers vertically (service position)
Ú
page 201.
Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of
water if possible.
Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution
over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the
sponge.
Rinse well with water and dry with a leather
chamois.
Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door frames, hood,
headlight frames, etc.) with special care, as water
may stagnate more easily in these areas. Do not
wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun
or with the hood hot: this may alter the shine of
the paintwork.
NOTE:
Avoid parking under trees; the resin dropped by
trees makes the paintwork go opaque and
increases the possibility of corrosion.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the
same way as the rest of the vehicle.
If washing the vehicle in a service that moves the
vehicle, for vehicles with automatic transmissions,
proceed with the following directions:
Ensure that the vehicle is on a flat surface.
Disable the automatic engagement of the
parking brake
Ú
page 84.
With the vehicle stationary, the gear in
NEUTRAL (N) and the brake pedal pressed,
push the START button.
NOTE:
The vehicle will remain in NEUTRAL (N) for
15 minutes before PARK (P) will be engaged auto-
matically.
Windows
Use specific detergents and clean cloths to
prevent scratching or altering the transparency.
Front Headlights
Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergent for
washing vehicles.
NOTE:
Never use aromatic substances (e.g. gasoline)
or ketones (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the
plastic lenses of the headlights.
When cleaning with a pressure washer, keep
the pressure washer at least eight inches
(20 cm) away from the headlights.
CAUTION!
Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth
following the direction of the filaments to avoid
damaging the heating device.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
232
Engine Compartment
At the end of every Winter, wash the engine
compartment thoroughly, taking care not to aim
the jet of water directly at the electronic control
units or at the windshield wiper motors. Have this
operation performed at a specialized workshop
Ú
page 200.
NOTE:
The washing should take place with the engine
cold and the ignition device in the STOP position.
After the washing operation, make sure that the
various protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards)
have not been removed or damaged.
INTERIORS
Periodically check the cleanliness of the interior,
beneath the mats, which could cause oxidation of
the sheet metal.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum
cleaner. It is advised to use a moist brush on
velvet upholstery. Rub the seats with a sponge
moistened with a solution of water and neutral
detergent.
Cleaning heat press images on seats —
if equipped:
Due to the color, opacity and wear-resistant
protection with which the heat press images on
some seats are made, they may be subject to
temporary scratching if they are touched by finger
nails, keys, or other hard objects. In such cases,
the visible signs do not impair the profiled
images, and can easily be removed by wiping the
affected area with a microfiber cloth moistened
with water (not dry) to restore the seat to its
original condition. The microfiber cloth must not
have been previously soaked in other substances
or detergents.
LEATHER SEATS
Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or slightly
damp cloth, without exerting too much pressure.
Remove any liquid or grease stains using an
absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. Then clean
with a soft cloth or buckskin cloth dampened with
water and mild soap. If the stain persists, use
specific products and observe the instructions
carefully.
NOTE:
Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning
products used contain no alcohol or alcohol deriv-
atives, even in small quantities.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if
possible made from microfiber), and a solution of
water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent.
To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific
products free from solvents and designed to
maintain the original appearance and color of the
components.
Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if
necessary moistened with water. The use of
paper tissues is not recommended as these may
leave residues.
ALCANTARA PARTS — IF EQUIPPED
Alcantara parts maintenance procedure:
Treat the surface with a microfiber cloth
moistened with mild marseille soap and water,
taking care to apply a uniform light pressure
over the entire area (do not rub vigorously).
Rinse and wring out the microfiber cloth, and
pass it over the entire area again.
Let it dry, and then brush gently with a soft
brush.
GENUINE LEATHER PARTS
Use only water and mild soap to clean these
parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based
products.
Before using a specific product for cleaning
interiors, make sure that it does not contain
alcohol and/or alcohol based substances.
CARBON FIBER PARTS
To eliminate small scratches and marks on the
carbon, contact an authorized dealer. An
improperly performed operation may irreparably
damage the carbon.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
233
For the enthusiasts, the technician, or those who
just want to know every detail of their vehicle,
useful information on understanding how your
vehicle works is contained in this chapter and
illustrated with data, tables, and graphics.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is stamped on a plate on the front left
corner of the dashboard trim, which can be seen
from outside the vehicle, through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
P
LATE
The plates are located on the left side A-pillar and
contain the following data:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).
Color code.
Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and
Mexico only).
Vehicle manufacturing date.
Maximum permitted weights.
Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA and
Canada only).
ENGINE
2.0L Engine
Cycle Four
Number and position of cylinders 4 inline
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 90
Total displacement (cm³) 1,995
Compression ratio 10:1
Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280
Maximum power (kW) 209
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 5,200
Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 295
Maximum torque (Nm) 400
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234
POWER SUPPLY
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 2,250 - 4,000
Fuel
87 Octane Minimum (R+M)/2 Method, 91 Recommended, ethanol
percentage is 0–15%.
2.9L Engine
Cycle Four
Number and position of cylinders 6 / V
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82
Total displacement (cm³) 2,891
Compression ratio 9.3:1
Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505
Maximum power (kW) 375
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 6,500
Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 443
Maximum torque (Nm) 600
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 2,500
Fuel
87 Octane Minimum (R+M)/2 Method, 91 Recommended, ethanol
percentage is 0–15%.
Power supply
2.0L Engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control
2.9L Engine
Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable
intake valve actuation
2.0L Engine
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
235
TRANSMISSION
BRAKES
SUSPENSION
STEERING
Version Transmission Traction
2.0L Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive
2.0L Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse Rear-Wheel Drive
2.9L Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive
Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake
2.0L Engine and 2.9L Engine Disc Disc Electric
CAUTION!
Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to
avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
Version Front Rear
2.0L Engine
Independent wheel double-wishbone
suspension
Independent wheel with multilink system
2.9L Engine
Independent wheel double-wishbone
suspension
Independent wheel with multilink system
Version Curb-to-curb turning circle Type
2.0L Engine 38.55 ft (11.75 m) Rack and pinion with electric power steering
2.9L Engine Curb-to-curb turning circle Type
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
236
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.
Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.
A
Front
Overhang
B
Wheelbase
C
Rear
Overhang
D
Overall
Length
E
Overall
Height
F
Front Track
G
Rear Track
H
Overall
Width (Incl.
Mirrors)
I
Overall Width
(Excl. Mirrors)
33.9 inches
(862 mm)
111 inches
(2,818 mm)
39.7 inches
(1,008 mm)
184.6 inches
(4,688 mm)
66 inches
(1,677 mm)
63.5 inches
(1,612 mm)
65 inches
(1,650 mm)
85.2 inches
(2,163 mm)
74.9 inches
(1,903 mm)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
237
Quadrifoglio Model
A B C D E F G H I
31.3 inches
(795 mm)
111 inches
(2,818 mm)
40.3 inches
(1,023.6 mm)
182.6 inches
(4,638 mm)
56.1 inches
(1,424.9 mm)
61.2 inches
(1,554.5 mm)
63.3 inches
(1,607.8 mm)
79.7 inches
(2,024.4 mm)
73.7 inches
(1,872 mm)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
238
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT VOLUME
Capacity (VDA standards)
Rear seats not folded
Vehicle unladen: 18.54 cubic feet (525 liters)
WEIGHTS
Weights 2.0L Engine AWD 2.0L Engine RWD
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment)
4,006 lb 3,896 lb
Payload including the driver
1
1. If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted
loads.
992 lb 992 lb
Maximum permitted loads
2
2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
242 lb 242 lb
Front axle 2,491 lb 2,403 lb
Rear axle 2,976 lb 2,932 lb
Total 5,247 lb 5,115 lb
Towable loads - -
Braked trailer 3,000 lb (1,360 kg) 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Unbraked trailer 1,000 lb (454 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
Maximum load on roof 165 lb (75 kg) 165 lb (75 kg)
Maximum load on tow hitch (braked trailer) 300 lb (136 kg) 300 lb (136 kg)
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
239
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having a posted octane
number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
For optimal performance the use of 91 or higher
octane premium gasoline is recommended in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance and
durability of engine and fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Weights 2.9L engine
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
4,308 lb
Payload including the driver
1
1. If special equipment is fitted the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.
992 lb
Maximum permitted loads
2
2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
242 lb
– Front axle 2,579 lb
– Rear axle 2,976 lb
– Total 5,423 lb
Maximum load on roof 165 lb (75 kg)
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
240
(Continued)
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the respon-
sibility of the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components.
Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark
plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used
in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may
not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When
available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage the
emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or
ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels
or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
241
FLUID CAPACITIES
2.0L Engine
US Metric
Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters
Fuel tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters
Engine cooling system 2.3 Gallons 8.8 Liters
Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.25 Liters
Engine oil sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters
Automatic transmission 9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters
RDU 230-LSD differential 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) 1.4 Quarts 1.3 Liters
RDU 210/215-LSD differential 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters
AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters
AWD System Transfer Case 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters
2.9L Engine
US Metric
Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters
Fuel tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters
Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters
Intercooler cooling system 1.5 Gallons 5.75 Liters
Engine oil sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters
Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
242
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
If lubricants conforming to the requested specification are not available, products that meets indicated features can be used to top up; in this case optimal
performance of the engine is not guaranteed.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters
Automatic transmission 9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV
Main body: 0.8 Quarts
Left TV: 0.64 Quarts
Right TV: 0.72 Quarts
Main body: 0.8 Liters
Left TV: 0.61 Liters
Right TV: 0.68 Liters
AWD System FAD transfer case 0.48 Quarts 0.45 Liters
AWD System Transfer Case 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters
Engine Features Specification Replacement interval
2.0L
We recommend using Mopar® API
SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 0W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard
MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic
0W-30 API SP engine oil can be
used but must have the API Donut
Trademark.
MS-13340 According To Maintenance Plan
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended
API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can
cause engine damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
2.9L 5W-40 ACEA C3 API SN FPT 9.55535-GH2 MS-12991 According To Maintenance Plan
2.9L Engine
US Metric
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
243
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Use Features Specification Applications
Lubricants and greases
ZF 8HP 50 – Synthetic ATF - Automatic transmission-2.0L / 2.9L
SAE 75W-85 Synthetic ATF FPW9.55550–DA9
Differential
RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU
210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD /
2.0L engine
SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 Synthetic
lubricant
FPW9.55550–DA10
AWD System FAD transfer case /
2.0L
Differential and reduction units
RDU 230-TV / 2.9L
SAE 75W Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550–DA11 AWD System transfer case
Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes
Engine coolant
CUNA NC956–16
ASTMD3306
MS.90032
Mix a minimum solution of 50%
engine coolant. Not mixable with
different formulation products.
1
1. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.
Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043
To be used diluted or undiluted in
windshield washer/wiper systems.
HVAC
R1234yf or R134a
(depending on the market)
– –
CAUTION!
The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the warranty.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
244
PERFORMANCE
Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.
* Based on manufacturer testing.
Engine Top speed mph / (km/h)
Acceleration from 0-60 mph /
(0-100 km/h) sec.
2.0L AWD Engine 143 / (230) * 5.4 *
2.0L RWD Engine 143 / (230) * 5.5 *
2.9L Engine 176 (283) * 3.6 *
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
245
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history, as this can often provide
a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you
call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that
you get prompt and high quality service. FCA US
LLC's authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ALFA ROMEO CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)
ALFA ROMEO CUSTOMER CARE
(C
ANADA)
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) Phone:
1-877-515-9112 (French)
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the manufacturer has installed special Telecom-
munication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment
at its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identifi-
cation Card in the mail within three weeks of the
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call FCA US LLC’s
Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
You may have purchased additional coverage
with an extended service contract. FCA Canada
Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts. Be
sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada
Inc. service contract. We are not responsible for
other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc.
service contract and you have a problem, you will
have to contact the administrator of that contract
for resolution. If you have any questions about
the service contract, call FCA's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC and FCA Canada Inc.
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://
www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP
.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive
harm.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
247
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and
correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com
(US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
(US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the device must be installed and
operated to provide a separation distance of at
least 20 cm from all persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un
minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source
de rayonnement et votre corps
NOTA:
Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant
pas été expressément approuvés par la partie
responsable de la conformité pourraient révoquer
l’autorisation d’utilisation de l’équipement.
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248
INDEX
A
Accessories Purchased By The Owner.......... 4
Active Blind Spot Assist .............................141
Active Safety Systems................................135
Active Speed Limiter ....................................97
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System ......135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ................................................98, 100
Off ...........................................................101
On............................................................101
Additives, Fuel ............................................240
Adjust
Forward.............................................. 31, 33
Rearward ........................................... 31, 33
Air Bag.........................................................157
Air Bag Operation...................................158
Air Bag Warning Light ............................156
Driver Knee Air Bag................................159
Enhanced Accident Response .....161, 190
Event Data Recorder (EDR)...................190
Front Air Bag...........................................157
If Deployment Occurs ............................161
Knee Impact Bolsters ............................159
Maintaining Your Air Bag System..........163
Maintenance ..........................................163
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.........157
Side Air Bags ..........................................159
Transporting Pets...................................173
Air Bag Light ......................................156, 173
Air Pressure
Tires ........................................................222
Alfa Active Suspension (AAS)....................... 94
Alfa DNA System ..........................................92
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................241
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System................135
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............................72
Automatic Climate Controls .........................48
Automatic Dimming Mirror...........................37
Automatic Door Locks ..................................28
Automatic Headlights...................................43
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........48
Automatic Transmission ..............................86
Auxiliary Driving Systems .......................... 139
Auxiliary Power Outlet ..................................54
B
Battery..................................................74, 199
Charging System Light .............................74
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................20
Battery Recharging.................................... 200
Belts, Seat.................................................. 173
Blind Spot Monitoring ............................... 139
Bodywork (Cleaning And Maintenance)... 231
B-Pillar Location......................................... 219
Brake System
Warning Light .................................... 70, 71
Brakes ........................................................ 235
Brake Fluid Level................................... 199
Brightness, Interior Lights............................45
Bulbs, Light ................................................ 174
C
Camera, Rear............................................. 122
Capacities, Fluid ........................................ 241
Carbon Monoxide Warning .............. 174, 175
Cargo Compartment.....................................62
Certification Label ..................................... 126
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................ 217
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light)..............................................80
Checking Levels ................................ 196, 197
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety............. 173
Checks, Safety ........................................... 173
Child Restraint ........................................... 164
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................ 166
Child Seat Installation ........................... 171
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat
Belt ..................................................... 170
Infant And Child Restraints................... 165
LATCH Positions.....................................167
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children.............................................. 167
Older Children And Child Restraints..... 166
Seating Positions................................... 167
Clean Air Gasoline ..................................... 239
Cleaning
Wheels.................................................... 227
Climate Control ......................................48, 53
Automatic................................................. 48
Compact Spare Tire ................................... 226
Contract, Service........................................ 245
Cooling System
Cooling Capacity .................................... 241
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........241
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .......... 98, 100
Customer Assistance................................. 245
D
Daytime Running Lights .............................. 42
Defroster, Windshield................................ 173
Dimensions ................................................236
Disabled Vehicle Towing............................ 188
Door Ajar.................................................75, 76
Door Ajar Light .......................................75, 76
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
249
Door Locks....................................................28
Automatic .................................................28
Door Opener, Garage ................................... 39
Doors............................................................. 25
Drive Train Control (DTC) System..............136
Driving Modes .............................................. 92
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System...136
E
Electric Park Brake....................................... 84
Electric Remote Mirrors...............................38
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).. 98
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System ........................................................136
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light... 75
Emergency
In Case Of ......................................176, 181
SOS Emergency Call ..............................176
Emergency, In Case Of
Jump Starting .........................................184
Overheating............................................187
Towing.....................................................189
Emission Control System Maintenance...... 80
Engine .........................................................233
Block Heater............................................. 83
Engine Coolant Level .............................198
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................174, 175
Fuel Requirements ................................239
Jump Starting .........................................186
Oil............................................................241
Oil Selection ...........................................241
Overheating............................................187
Starting ...................................................187
Engine Compartment.................................196
Engine Compartment (Washing) ...............231
Engine Oil
Level Check ........................................... 197
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature.............................................. 161, 190
Ethanol ....................................................... 239
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...................... 174, 175
Exhaust System ......................................... 174
Exterior Lighting............................................42
Exterior Lights......................................42, 174
F
Flashers
Hazard Warning..................................... 176
Turn Signals..............................44, 74, 174
Fluid Capacities ......................................... 241
Fluid Leaks................................................. 174
Fluids And Lubricants................................ 242
Fog Lights, Rear............................................44
Forward Collision Warning ........................ 145
Fuel
Additives ................................................ 240
Clean Air................................................. 239
Ethanol................................................... 239
Light ..........................................................77
Materials Added .................................... 240
Methanol................................................ 239
Tank Capacity ........................................ 241
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)................39
Gasoline, Clean Air .................................... 239
Gasoline, Reformulated ............................ 239
Gross Axle Weight Rating.......................... 127
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................... 127
GVWR ......................................................... 126
H
Hands-Free Liftgate ..................................... 61
Hazard Warning Flashers.......................... 176
Head Restraints ........................................... 35
Head Rests................................................... 35
Headlights
Switch....................................................... 42
Headlights (Cleaning) ................................ 231
Heated Mirrors............................................. 38
Heated Seats ............................................... 34
Heated Steering Wheel ............................... 30
Heater, Engine Block ................................... 83
Highway Assist System..............................106
Hill Decent Control (HDC) System............. 137
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System ................... 138
Hitches
Trailer Towing......................................... 128
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ............... 39
Hood
Closing...................................................... 59
Opening .................................................... 59
I
Ignition.......................................................... 22
Switch....................................................... 22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ............................. 21
In Case Of Emergency ............................... 176
Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices.........4
Instrument Cluster....................................... 64
Descriptions................................65, 66, 74
Display...................................................... 66
Reconfigurable Display ........................... 66
Instrument Panel
Features ................................................... 64
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250
INDEX
Intelligent Speed Control System..............113
Interior Lights ............................................... 44
Interiors (Cleaning).....................................232
J
Jump Starting .............................................184
K
Keyless Enter 'n Go™................................... 26
Passive Entry............................................ 26
Keys .............................................................. 19
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ................... 44
Lane Departure Warning System..............117
Lane Keep Assist System ..........................119
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................152
Latches .......................................................174
Leaks, Fluid ................................................174
Life Of Tires.................................................225
Liftgate.......................................................... 59
Light Bulbs..................................................174
Types Of Bulbs .......................................212
Lights ..........................................................174
Air Bag .................................... 70, 156, 173
Automatic Headlights .............................. 43
Brake Warning .................................. 70, 71
Courtesy/Reading............................. 44, 45
Daytime Running .....................................42
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ........................................ 72, 75
Exterior................................................... 174
Fog...................................................... 44, 73
Headlight Switch ......................................42
Headlights.................................................42
High Beam ................................................42
Instrument Cluster ...................................42
Intensity Control .......................................45
Interior.......................................................45
Low Fuel....................................................77
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....72
Map ...........................................................44
Oil Temperature........................................71
Park....................................................43, 74
Reading.....................................................44
Seat Belt Reminder..................................71
Turn Signals..............................44, 74, 174
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................................. 74, 75
Loading Vehicle ......................................... 126
Tires........................................................ 219
Locks
Automatic Door.........................................28
Child Protection........................................28
M
Maintenance.................................................59
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) ................................................... 72, 80
Manual
Service ................................................... 247
Memory Feature (Memory Seats)................30
Memory Seat.................................................30
Methanol.................................................... 239
Mirrors .......................................................... 37
Automatic Dimming................................. 37
Electric Powered...................................... 38
Electric Remote ....................................... 38
Heated...................................................... 38
O
Occupant Restraints.................................. 151
Oil Pressure Light......................................... 75
Oil, Engine
Capacity..................................................241
Pressure Warning Light........................... 75
Recommendation .................................. 241
Viscosity .................................................241
Opener, Garage Door (Homelink) ............... 39
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.....................................247
Outlet
Power........................................................ 54
Overheating, Engine .................................. 187
P
Paintwork (Cleaning And Maintenance)... 231
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System..............138
Park Assist.................................................. 115
ParkSense System.....................................115
Passive Entry................................................ 26
Performance (Top Speed) ......................... 244
Pets............................................................. 173
Placard, Tire And Loading Information..... 219
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
251
Power
Mirrors ...................................................... 38
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........... 54
Seats.........................................................33
Sunroof ..................................................... 57
Windows ................................................... 56
Power Seats
Forward.............................................. 31, 33
Rearward ........................................... 31, 33
Recline............................................... 31, 33
Power Supply..............................................234
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..............155
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................................155
Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ......................230
R
Radial Ply Tires...........................................224
Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ....... 4
Rear Camera ..............................................122
Rear Cross Path .........................................139
Reformulated Gasoline..............................239
Refueling Procedure ..................................124
Refueling The Vehicle ................................124
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................152
Remote Control
Starting System........................................ 23
Remote Keyless Entry..................................19
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .......................... 23
Remote Starting System....................... 23, 81
Replacement Tires .....................................225
Reporting Safety Defects...........................246
Restraints, Child.........................................164
Restraints, Head .......................................... 35
Rims And Tires........................................... 216
Roll Over Warning........................................... 3
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.................... 173
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle................. 174
Safety Defects, Reporting ......................... 246
Safety Information, Tire............................. 216
Safety Tips ................................................. 173
Safety, Exhaust Gas .................................. 174
Saving Fuel ................................................ 132
Scheduled Servicing.................................. 191
Scheduled Servicing Program
(2.0L T4 MAir Engine Versions) ................ 192
Scheduled Servicing Program
(2.9L V6 Gasoline Engine Versions)......... 194
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................71
Seat Belts.......................................... 152, 173
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................... 154
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage.......................................... 154
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage.......................................... 154
Child Restraints..................................... 164
Energy Management Feature............... 155
Front Seat .............................................. 152
Inspection .............................................. 173
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .............. 154
Lap/Shoulder Belts............................... 152
Pregnant Women................................... 155
Pretensioners ........................................ 155
Rear Seat............................................... 152
Reminder ............................................... 152
Seat Belt Pretensioner.......................... 155
Untwisting Procedure............................ 154
Seats.......................................................31, 33
Adjustment.........................................31, 33
Head Restraints....................................... 35
Heated...................................................... 34
Height Adjustment................................... 33
Power........................................................ 33
Tilting........................................................ 33
Security Alarm.............................................. 24
Service Assistance.....................................245
Service Contract......................................... 245
Service Manuals ........................................ 247
Servicing Procedures................................. 201
Shoulder Belts............................................ 152
Signals, Turn .................................44, 74, 174
Snow Chains .............................................. 228
Snow Tires.................................................. 228
Spare Tires ........................................226, 227
Speed Control
Accel/Decel.............................................. 99
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ......................... 102
Cancel..................................................... 100
Distance Setting (ACC Only).................. 103
Resume .................................................... 99
Set ............................................................ 99
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ................... 98
Starting ....................................................... 187
Button....................................................... 22
Cold Weather ........................................... 82
Remote..................................................... 23
Starting And Operating ..............................187
Starting Procedures...................................187
Starting The Engine ..................................... 81
Steering ...................................................... 235
Wheel, Heated ......................................... 30
Wheel, Tilt ................................................ 29
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252
INDEX
Stop/Start System ....................................... 95
Storage
Console..................................................... 54
Suggestions For Driving.............................132
Sun Roof ................................................ 57, 59
Supplemental Restraint System –
Air Bag.........................................................157
Suspension.................................................235
Symbol Glossary...........................................14
Symbols .......................................................... 6
System, Remote Starting............................. 23
T
Telescoping Steering Column......................29
Tilt Steering Column.....................................29
Tire And Loading Information Placard ......219
Tire Markings..............................................216
Tire Safety Information ..............................216
Tire Service Kit ...........................................181
Tires .................................174, 222, 226, 229
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................225
Air Pressure ............................................222
Changing.................................................181
Compact Spare ......................................226
General Information......................222, 226
High Speed .............................................223
Inflation Pressure...................................222
Life Of Tires ............................................225
Load Capacity................................219, 220
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...... 73
Quality Grading.......................................229
Radial......................................................224
Replacement..........................................225
Safety.............................................216, 222
Sizes .......................................................217
Snow Tires ............................................. 228
Spare Tires.................................... 226, 227
Spinning................................................. 225
Trailer Towing ........................................ 130
Tread Wear Indicators........................... 225
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight.................. 129
Towing ............................................... 127, 128
Disabled Vehicle.................................... 188
Towing Eyes ............................................... 189
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) ...................................................... 149
Traction Control System (TCS).................. 139
Traffic Jam Assist System ......................... 109
Traffic Sign Recognition System............... 112
Trailer Towing............................................. 127
Hitches................................................... 128
Minimum Requirements....................... 129
Tips......................................................... 131
Trailer And Tongue Weight........... 128, 129
Wiring ..................................................... 130
Trailer Towing Guide.................................. 128
Trailer Weight............................................. 128
Transmission ............................................. 235
Transporting Pets ...................................... 173
Tread Wear Indicators............................... 225
Turn Signals ........................................... 44, 74
U
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features.........26
Passive Entry Programming.....................26
Uniform Tire Quality Grades...................... 229
Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®)
S..........................................39
Universal Transmitter...................................39
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ............... 154
Use Of The Owner’s Manual...........................5
V
Vehicle Changes/Alterations .........................4
Vehicle Identification Number .................. 233
Vehicle Loading................................. 126, 220
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................................................ 72
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................3
Warranty Information ................................ 246
Washer Fluid For Windshield/
Headlights .................................................. 198
Washers, Windshield................................... 46
Weights....................................................... 238
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care.......................227
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ....................... 227
Wheels And Tires ....................................... 216
Wind Buffeting ............................................. 57
Windows
Power........................................................ 56
Windows (Cleaning) ...................................231
Windshield Defroster................................. 173
Windshield Washers.................................... 46
Windshield Wiper
Replacing Blades...................................203
Windshield Wipers ....................................... 46
Wipers, Rain Sensitive................................. 46
Wireless Charging Pad ................................ 55
22_GU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of
the Warranty Booklet by calling 844-253-2872 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed
copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular
telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo
brand vehicle and to
provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com
(U.S.), www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call
a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO
Second Edition
22_GU_OM_EN_USC
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A.,
used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).
U. S.
alfaromeousa.com/
owners/owners-service-manual
Canada
alfaromeo.ca/en/
owners/owners-service-manual
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
